VOLVO C30 Owner's manualnew.volvocars.com/ownersdocs/2010/2010_C30/2010C30OwnersManual.pdf · Volvo and the environment 12 Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-tomers

VOLVO C30

Owner's manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trustthat you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, anautomobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. Weencourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipmentdescriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We alsourge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times inthis (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operatea vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or anyimpairment that could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety andemission standards. For further information please contactyour retailer, or:

In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer CareCenter

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

2009 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.

Contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

0000 Introduction

General information.................................. 10Volvo and the environment....................... 12Important warnings................................... 13

0101 Safety

Occupant safety........................................ 16Seat belts.................................................. 18Supplemental Restraint System............... 21Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS).............. 26Side impact protection airbags................. 29Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC).................... 30Whiplash Protection System..................... 32Crash mode.............................................. 34Child safety............................................... 35Child restraint systems............................. 37Infant seats............................................... 39Convertible seats...................................... 41Booster cushions...................................... 43ISOFIX lower anchors............................... 44Top tether anchors.................................... 45Child restraint registration and recalls...... 46

0202 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview.................................. 50Instrument panel....................................... 53Indicator and warning symbols................. 55Symbols – instrument panel..................... 57Information display................................... 6012-volt sockets......................................... 62Lighting panel........................................... 63Left-side steering wheel lever................... 65Trip computer........................................... 67Cruise control*.......................................... 69Right-side steering wheel lever................. 71Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warn-ing flashers................................................ 74Parking brake............................................ 75Power windows......................................... 76Mirrors....................................................... 77Power moonroof*...................................... 80Personal settings...................................... 82HomeLink® Wireless Control System*..... 85

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

0303 Climate

General information.................................. 90Air vents.................................................... 92Manual climate control.............................. 93Electronic Climate Control (ECC)*............ 96Air distribution........................................... 99

0404 Interior

Front seats.............................................. 102Interior lighting........................................ 110Storage compartments........................... 111Rear seat................................................. 115Cargo area.............................................. 117

0505 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade..................... 122Keyless drive*.......................................... 127Locking and unlocking............................ 131Alarm*..................................................... 132

Contents


0606 Starting and driving

General information................................ 138Fuel requirements................................... 142Ignition switch......................................... 145Starting the vehicle................................. 146Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*... 148Manual transmission, 6-speed*.............. 149Automatic transmission*......................... 150Shiftlock override.................................... 152Brake system.......................................... 153Stability system....................................... 155Towing.................................................... 157Jump starting.......................................... 159Transporting loads.................................. 160Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*... 161Park assist*............................................. 165 07

07 Wheels and tires

General information................................ 170Tire inflation............................................. 173Inflation pressure—U.S. models ............ 175Inflation pressure—Canadian models .... 176Tire designations..................................... 177Glossary of tire terminology.................... 179Vehicle loading........................................ 180Uniform tire quality gradings................... 181Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires. . 182Temporary spare..................................... 183Wheel nuts.............................................. 184Changing a wheel................................... 185Tire Sealing System ............................... 187Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 193 08

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car................. 198Paint touch up......................................... 202

Contents

7

0909 Maintenance and servicing

Volvo maintenance.................................. 206Maintaining your car............................... 208Hood....................................................... 210Engine compartment............................... 211Engine oil................................................ 212Fluids...................................................... 214Wiper blades........................................... 216Battery..................................................... 217Replacing bulbs...................................... 219Fuses...................................................... 227 10

10 Audio

Audio functions....................................... 236Radio functions....................................... 241CD player/CD changer............................ 249Audio menu............................................. 253Bluetooth® hands-free connection......... 254

1111 Specifications

Label information.................................... 262Dimensions and weights......................... 264Fuel, oils, and fluids................................ 267Engine oil................................................ 269Engine specifications.............................. 270Electrical system..................................... 272Three-way catalytic converter................. 274Volvo programs....................................... 275

Contents

8

1212 Index

Index....................................................... 276

Contents

9

Introduction

General information

10

About this manual

• Before you operate your vehicle for the firsttime, please familiarize yourself with thenew-engine oil consumption information,see page 212. You should also be familiarwith the information found in the chapters"Instruments and controls", and "Startingand driving".

• Information contained in the balance of themanual is extremely useful and should beread after operating the vehicle for the firsttime.

• The manual is structured so that it can beused for reference. For this reason, itshould be kept in the vehicle for readyaccess.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described inthis manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not beavailable in all countries or markets. Pleasenote that some vehicles may be equipped dif-ferently, depending on special legal require-ments.

Optional or accessory equipment may not beavailable in all countries or markets. Pleasenote that some vehicles may be equipped dif-ferently, depending on special legal require-ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor-mation.

NOTE

• All information, illustrations and specifi-cations contained in this manual arebased on the latest product informationavailable at the time of publication.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change spec-ifications or design without notice andwithout incurring obligation.

• Do not export your Volvo to anothercountry before investigating that coun-try's applicable safety and emissioncontrol requirements. In some cases itmay be difficult or impossible to complywith these requirements. Modificationsto the emission control system(s) mayrender your Volvo not certifiable forlegal operation in the U.S., Canada andother countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,unseen damage may affect its driveabilityand safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the state of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm. In addition, certainfluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such asair bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,adaptive steering columns, and button cellbatteries may contain Perchlorate material.Special handling may apply for service orvehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Shiftlock (automatic transmission)

When your car is parked, the gear selector islocked in the Park (P) position. To release theselector from this position, turn the ignition keyto position II (or start the engine), depress thebrake pedal, press the button on the front sideof the gear selector and move the selector fromPark (P).

Introduction

General information

11

Keylock (automatic transmission)

When the ignition is switched off, the gearselector must be in the Park (P) position beforethe key can be removed from the ignitionswitch.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system in your car performs a self-diagnostic test when the vehicle first reachesthe speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).The brake pedal will pulsate several times anda sound may be audible from the ABS controlmodule. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel whenthe car is at a standstill to open the fuel fillerdoor.

Fuel filler cap

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn-ing it clockwise until it clicks into place. If thiscap is not closed tightly or if the engine is run-ning when the car is refueled, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ("Check Engine" light) mayindicate a fault.

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

12

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,we care about the environment in which we alllive. Caring for the environment means aneveryday involvement in reducing our environ-mental impact. Volvo's environmental activitiesare based on a holistic view, which means weconsider the overall environmental impact of aproduct throughout its complete life cycle. Inthis context, design, production, product use,and recycling are all important considerations.In production, Volvo has partly or completelyphased out several chemicals including CFCs,lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; andreduced the number of chemicals used in ourplants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce intoproduction a three-way catalytic converter witha Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygensensor, in 1976. The current version of thishighly efficient system reduces emissions ofharmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from theexhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% andthe search to eliminate the remaining emis-sions continues. Volvo is the only automobilemanufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits forthe air conditioning system of all models as farback as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels arebringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi-cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling

is the next critical step in completing the lifecycle. The metal content is about 75% of thetotal weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehi-cle among the most recycled industrial prod-ucts. In order to have efficient and well-con-trolled recycling, dismantling information isavailable for all Volvo models. For Volvo, allhomogeneous plastic parts weighing morethan 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with inter-national symbols that indicate how the com-ponent is to be sorted for recycling. In additionto continuous environmental refinement ofconventional gasoline-powered internal com-bustion engines, Volvo is actively looking atadvanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-ner in the work to lessen the car's impact onthe environment. To reduce your vehicle'senvironmental impact, you can:

• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-omy with improperly inflated tires.

• Follow the recommended maintenanceschedule in your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet.

• Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-sible.

• See a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician as soon as possible for inspec-tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

cator) light illuminates, or stays on after thevehicle has started.

• Properly dispose of any vehicle-relatedwaste such as used motor oil, used batter-ies, brake pads, etc.

• When cleaning your vehicle, please usegenuine Volvo car care products. All Volvocar care products are formulated to beenvironmentally friendly.

For additional information regarding the envi-ronmental activities in which Volvo Cars ofNorth America, LLC and Volvo Car Corporationare involved, visit our Internet home page at:http://www.volvocars.us.

Introduction

Important warnings

13

Accessory Installation

• We strongly recommend that Volvo ownersinstall only genuine, Volvo-approvedaccessories, and that accessory installa-tions be performed only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested toensure compatibility with the performance,safety, and emission systems in your vehi-cle. Additionally, a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician knows whereaccessories may and may not be safelyinstalled in your Volvo. In all cases, pleaseconsult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before installing any acces-sory in or on your vehicle.

• Accessories that have not been approvedby Volvo may or may not be specificallytested for compatibility with your vehicle.Additionally, an inexperienced installermay not be familiar with some of your vehi-cle's systems.

• Any of your vehicle's performance andsafety systems could be adversely affec-ted if you install accessories that Volvo hasnot tested, or if you allow accessories to beinstalled by someone unfamiliar with yourvehicle.

• Damage caused by unapproved orimproperly installed accessories may notbe covered by your new vehicle warranty.See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warrantyinformation. Volvo assumes no responsi-bility for death, injury, or expenses thatmay result from the installation of nonge-nuine accessories.

Driver distraction

• Driver distraction results from driver activ-ities that are not directly related to control-ling the vehicle in the driving environment.Your new Volvo is, or can be, equippedwith many feature-rich entertainment andcommunication systems. These includehands-free cellular telephones, navigationsystems, and multipurpose audio systems.You may also own other portable elec-tronic devices for your own convenience.When used properly and safely, they enrichthe driving experience. Improperly used,any of these could cause a distraction.

• For all of these systems, we want to pro-vide the following warning that reflects thestrong Volvo concern for your safety:

• Never use these devices or any feature ofyour vehicle in a way that distracts youfrom the task of driving safely. Distractioncan lead to a serious accident. In additionto this general warning, we offer the fol-lowing guidance regarding specific newerfeatures that may be found in your vehicle:

• Never use a hand-held cellular telephonewhile driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while thevehicle is moving.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-tion system, set and make changes to yourtravel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

• Never program your audio system whilethe vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-sets with the vehicle parked, and use yourprogrammed presets to make radio usequicker and simpler.

• Never use portable computers or personaldigital assistants while the vehicle is mov-ing.

A driver has a responsibility to do everythingpossible to ensure his or her own safety andthe safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractionsis part of that responsibility.

G020871

14

Occupant safety...................................................................................... 16Seat belts................................................................................................ 18Supplemental Restraint System.............................................................. 21Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)............................................................. 26Side impact protection airbags............................................................... 29Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC).................................................................. 30Whiplash Protection System................................................................... 32Crash mode............................................................................................ 34Child safety............................................................................................. 35Child restraint systems........................................................................... 37Infant seats.............................................................................................. 39Convertible seats.................................................................................... 41Booster cushions.................................................................................... 43ISOFIX lower anchors............................................................................. 44Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 45Child restraint registration and recalls.................................................... 46

01SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

16

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concerndates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolledoff the production line. Three-point seat belts(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were designed intoVolvo cars long before it was fashionable orrequired by government regulation.

We will not compromise our commitment tosafety. We continue to seek out new safetyfeatures and to refine those already in our cars.You can help. We would appreciate hearingyour suggestions about improving automobilesafety. We also want to know if you ever havea safety concern with your car. Call us in theU.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on howold you are but rather on:

• How well you see.

• Your ability to concentrate.

• How quickly you make decisions understress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to helpyou cope with the ever changing traffic envi-ronment.

• Never drink and drive.

• If you are taking any medication, consultyour physician about its potential effectson your driving abilities.

• Take a driver-retraining course.

• Have your eyes checked regularly.

• Keep your windshield and headlightsclean.

• Replace wiper blades when they start toleave streaks.

• Take into account the traffic, road, andweather conditions, particularly withregard to stopping distance.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your retailer, or VolvoCars of North America, LLC. To con-tact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that ifyour vehicle is covered under a serv-ice campaign, safety or emissionrecall or similar action, it should becompleted as soon as possible.Please check with your local retaileror Volvo Cars of North America, LLCif your vehicle is covered under theseconditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

17

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect thatcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Carsof Canada Corp.

To contact Transport Canada, call(800) 333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you arecalling from the Ottawa region.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

18

Using seat belts

G020104

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-erly restrained, using an infant, car, or boosterseat determined by age, weight and height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in thefront seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatoryfor occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

All seat belts are equipped with pretensionersthat reduce slack in the belts. These preten-sioners are triggered in situations where thefront or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer-

tain impacts from the rear. The front seat beltsalso include a tension reducing device which,in the event of a collision, limits the peak forcesexerted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Buckling a seat belt

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latchplate into the receptacle until a distinct click isheard. The seat belt retractor is normally"unlocked" and you can move freely, providedthat the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

NOTE

The seat belt is easiest to reach by graspingit near the lower seat belt guide, not over theshoulder.

The retractor will lock up as follows:

• if the belt is pulled out rapidly

• during braking and acceleration

• if the vehicle is leaning excessively

• when driving in turns

When wearing the seat belt remember:

• The belt should not be twisted or turned.

• The lap section of the belt must be posi-tioned low on the hips (not pressing againstthe abdomen).

• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolledup into its retractor and that the shoulderand lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

• To remove the seat belt, press the red sec-tion on the seat belt receptacle. Beforeexiting the vehicle, check that the seat beltretracts fully after being unbuckled. If nec-essary, guide the belt back into the retrac-tor slot.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than oneoccupant. Never wear the shoulder portionof the belt under the arm, behind the backor otherwise out of position. Such use couldcause injury in the event of an accident. Asseat belts lose much of their strength whenexposed to violent stretching, they shouldbe replaced after any collision, even if theyappear to be undamaged.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

��

19

WARNING

• Never repair the belt yourself; have thiswork done by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician only.

• Any device used to induce slack into theshoulder belt portion of the three-pointbelt system will have a detrimentaleffect on the amount of protection avail-able to you in the event of a collision.

• The seat back should not be tilted toofar back. The shoulder belt must be tautin order to function properly.

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children who have outgrown thesedevices sit in the rear seat with the seatbelt properly fastened.

Seat belt guides

G020106

Seat belt guides (on both front seats)

These guides are designed to help provideeasier access to the seat belts. A belt can betaken out of the guide and slid to the rearmostpart of the lower seat belt anchorage rod tomake it easier for passengers to enter or exitthe rear seat.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

G020105

The seat belt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in thecorrect way. The diagonal section should wrapover the shoulder then be routed between thebreasts and to the side of the belly. The lapsection should lay flat over the thighs and aslow as possible under the belly. It must neverbe allowed to ride upward. Remove all slackfrom the belt and insure that it fits close to thebody without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheelsuch that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means they mustbe able to easily operate the foot pedals and

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

20

steering wheel). Within this context, theyshould strive to position the seat with as largea distance as possible between their belly andthe steering wheel.

Child seats

Please refer to page 37 for information onsecuring child seats with the seat belts.

Seat belt reminder

G018084

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audiblesignal, an indicator light near the rearview mir-ror and a symbol in the instrument panel thatalert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their

seat belts. The audible signal and warning lightwill be on for a total of 6 seconds from the timethe ignition is switched on, regardless of

whether or not the seat belts are fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while thevehicle is in motion, the audible signal andwarning light will be active for a total of 6 sec-onds.

Rear seats

The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has twoadditional functions:

• It provides information about which seatbelts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-sage will appear in the information displaywhen a belt is being used. This messagewill disappear after approximately 6 sec-onds or can be erased by pressing theREAD button on the left steering wheellever.

• It also provides a reminder if one of theoccupants of the rear seat has unbuckledhis/her seat belt while the vehicle is inmotion. A visual and audible signal will begiven. These signals will stop when theseat belt has been re-buckled or can bestopped by pressing the READ button.

The message in the information display canalways be accessed, even if it has been erased,by pressing the READ button to display storedmessages.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are ingood condition. Use water and a mild deter-gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanismfunction as follows: attach the seat belt and pullrapidly on the strap.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

��

21

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

G026330

SRS warning light

As an enhancement to the three-point seatbelts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRSconsists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-bags, side impact airbags, the occupantweight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All ofthese systems are monitored by the SRS con-trol module. An SRS warning light in the instru-ment panel (see the illustration) illuminateswhen the ignition key is turned to position I, II,or III, and will normally go out after approxi-mately 7 seconds if no faults are detected inthe system.

Where applicable, a text message will also bedisplayed when the SRS warning light illumi-nates. If this warning symbol is not functioningproperly, the general warning symbol illumi-nates and either SRS AIRBAG SERVICE

URGENT or SRS AIRBAG SERVICE

REQUIRED will be displayed.

WARNING

• If the SRS warning light stays on afterthe engine has started or if it illuminateswhile you are driving, have the vehicleinspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician as soon aspossible.

• Never try to repair any component orpart of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function and serious injury. All work onthese systems should be performed bya trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has been subjected to floodconditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standingwater on the floor of the vehicle) or if yourvehicle has become flood-damaged in anyway, do not attempt to start the vehicle orput the key in the ignition before discon-necting the battery (see below). This maycause airbag deployment which could resultin personal injury. Have the vehicle towed toa trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician for repairs.

Automatic transmission

Before attempting to tow the vehicle, usethe following procedure to override theshiftlock system to move the gear selectorto the neutral position:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least10 minutes and disconnect the battery.

2. Wait at least one minute.

3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn itto position II.

4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

5. Move the gear selector from Park (P) tothe Neutral (N) position, see page 152,for information on manually overridingthe shiftlock system.

01 Safety


22

The front airbag system

G020111

The front airbags supplement the three-pointseat belts. For these airbags to provide theprotection intended, seat belts must be wornat all times.

The front airbag system includes gas genera-tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-tion sensors that activate the gas generators,causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogengas.

G015167

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants com-presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-led at a controlled rate to provide better cush-ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners alsodeploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entireprocess, including inflation and deflation of theairbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec-ond.

The location of the front airbags is indicated bySRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheelpad and above the glove compartment, and bydecals on both sun visors and on the front andfar right side of the dash.

• The driver's side front airbag is folded andlocated in the steering wheel hub.

• The passenger's side front airbag is foldedbehind a panel located above the glovecompartment.

01 Safety


��

23

WARNING

• The airbags in the vehicle are designedto be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a replace-ment for-the three-point seat belts. Formaximum protection, wear seat belts atall times. Be aware that no system canprevent all possible injuries that mayoccur in an accident.

• Never drive a vehicle with a steeringwheel-mounted airbag with your handson the steering wheel pad/airbag hous-ing.

• The front airbags are designed to helpprevent serious injury. Deploymentoccurs very quickly and with consider-able force. During normal deploymentand depending on variables such asseating position, one may experienceabrasions, bruises, swellings, or otherinjuries as a result from deployment ofone or both of the airbags.

• When installing any accessory equip-ment, make sure that the front airbagsystem is not damaged. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function.

Front airbag deployment

• The front airbags are designed to deployduring certain frontal or front-angular col-lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed andobject impacted. The airbags may alsodeploy in certain non-frontal collisionswhere rapid deceleration occurs.

• The SRS sensors, which trigger the frontairbags, are designed to react to both theimpact of the collision and the inertialforces generated by it, and to determine ifthe intensity of the collision is sufficient forthe seat belt pretensioners and/or airbagsto be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate thefront airbags.

• If the collision involves a nonrigid object(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixedobject at a low speed, the front airbags willnot necessarily deploy.

• Front airbags do not normally deploy in aside impact collision, in a collision from therear or in a rollover situation.

• The amount of damage to the bodyworkdoes not reliably indicate if the airbagsshould have deployed or not.

NOTE

• Deployment of front airbags occurs onlyone time during an accident. In a colli-sion where deployment occurs, the air-bags and seat belt pretensioners acti-vate. Some noise occurs and a smallamount of powder is released. Therelease of the powder may appear assmoke-like matter. This is a normalcharacteristic and does not indicate fire.

• Volvo's front airbags use special sen-sors that are integrated with the frontseat buckles. The point at which the air-bag deploys is determined by whetheror not the seat belt is being used, as wellas the severity of the collision.

• Collisions can occur where only one ofthe airbags deploys. If the impact is lesssevere, but severe enough to present aclear injury risk, the airbags are trig-gered at partial capacity. If the impact ismore severe, the airbags are triggeredat full capacity.

Should you have questions about any compo-nent in the SRS system, please contact atrained and qualified Volvo service technicianor Volvo Customer Support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

01 Safety


24

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914


1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.


175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocanada.com

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat occupants under 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) in height who have outgrownthese devices sit in the rear seat with theseat belt fastened1.

• Never drive with the airbags deployed.The fact that they hang out can impairthe steering of your vehicle. Othersafety systems can also be damaged.

• The smoke and dust formed when theairbags are deployed can cause skinand eye irritation in the event of pro-longed exposure.

G032243

Airbag decal in the front passenger's door opening

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.

01 Safety


25

G032525

Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard

G032934

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

WARNING

• Children must never be allowed in thefront passenger's seat. Volvo recom-mends that ALL occupants (adults andchildren) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) be seated in the back seat ofany vehicle with a passenger-side frontairbag. See page 36 for guidelines.

• Occupants in the front passenger's seatmust never sit on the edge of the seat,sit leaning toward the instrument panelor otherwise sit out of position.

• The occupant's back must be as uprightas comfort allows and be against theseat back with the seat belt properlyfastened.

• Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not onthe dash, seat or out of the window.

WARNING

• No objects or accessory equipment,e.g. dashboard covers, may be placedon, attached to, or installed near the airbag hatch (the area above the glovecompartment) or the area affected byairbag deployment.

• There should be no loose articles, e.g.coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash-board area.

• Never try to open the airbag cover onthe steering wheel or the passenger'sside dashboard. This should only bedone by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) 01

26

Disabling the passenger's side frontairbag

2

G018082

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adultsand children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi-cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and beproperly restrained. Children should always beseated in child restraints appropriate for theirsize and weight. See also the child safety rec-ommendations on page 35.

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) isdesigned to meet the regulatory requirementsof Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will

not inflate) the passenger's side front airbagunder certain conditions.

The OWS works with sensors that are part ofthe front passenger's seat and seat belt. Thesensors are designed to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant and determine ifthe passenger's side front airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or disabled (will notinflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-senger's side front airbag when:

• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,or has small/medium objects in the frontseat,

• the system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat that isinstalled according to the manufacturer'sinstructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraintthat is installed according to the manufac-turer's instructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time,

• a child or a small person occupies the frontpassenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay onto remind you that the passenger's side frontairbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp is located in the overheadconsole, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE

When the ignition is switched on, the OWSindicator light will go on for up to 10 secondswhile the system performs a self-diagnostictest.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

• The OWS indicator light will stay on

• The SRS warning light (see page 21) willcome on and stay on

The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF SERVICE

URGENT will be displayed in the informationdisplay.

01 Safety


��

27

WARNING

If a fault in the system is detected and indi-cated as explained on the preceding page,be aware that the passenger's side front air-bag will not deploy in the event of a collision.In this case, the SRS system and OccupantWeight Sensor should be inspected by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian as soon as possible.

WARNING

• Never try to open, remove, or repair anycomponents in the OWS system. Thiscould result in system malfunction.Maintenance or repairs should only becarried out by an a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• The front passenger's seat should notbe modified in any way. This couldreduce pressure on the seat cushion,which might interfere with the OWS sys-tem's function.

The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate)the passenger's side front airbag when a rearfacing infant seat, a forward-facing childrestraint, or a booster seat is detected. ThePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp willilluminate and stay on to remind you that the

passenger's side front airbag is disabled (seethe following table).

Passenger'sseat occu-pancy status

OWS indica-tor light sta-tus

Passenger'sside frontairbag sta-tus

Seat unoc-cupied

OWS indica-tor light

lightsup

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-bled

Seat occu-pied by lowweightoccupant/objectA


lightsup

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-bled

Seat occu-pied byheavy occu-pant/object


is notlit

Passenger'sside frontairbag ena-bled

A Volvo recommends that children always be properlyrestrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Donot assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabledunless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there isany doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air-bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)the passenger's side front airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult size is

sitting properly in the front passenger's seat.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp will be off and remain off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger's seat, but the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possiblethat the person isn't sitting properly in the seat.If this happens:

1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person toplace the seatback in an upright position.

2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with the per-son's legs comfortably extended.

3. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable the pas-senger's frontal airbag.

4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp remains on even after this, the personshould be advised to ride in the rear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWSclassification capability. It does not indicateOWS malfunction.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle inany way to accommodate a disability, forexample by altering or adapting the driver's or

01 Safety


28

front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-tems, please contact Volvo at:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914


1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.


175 Gordon Baker Road North York, OntarioM2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

WARNING

• No objects that add to the total weighton the seat should be placed on thefront passenger's seat. If a child isseated in the front passenger's seatwith any additional weight, this extraweight could cause the OWS system toenable the airbag, which might cause itto deploy in the event of a collision,thereby injuring the child.

• The seat belt should never be wrappedaround an object on the front passeng-er's seat. This could interfere with theOWS system's function.

• The front passenger's seat belt shouldnever be used in a way that exerts morepressure on the passenger than normal.This could increase the pressure exer-ted on the weight sensor by a child, andcould result in the airbag being enabled,which might cause it to deploy in theevent of a collision, thereby injuring thechild.

WARNING

Keep the following points in mind withrespect to the OWS system. Failure to followthese instructions could adversely affect thesystem's function and result in serious injuryto the occupant of the front passenger'sseat:

• The full weight of the front seat passen-ger should always be on the seat cush-ion. The passenger should never lifthim/herself off the seat cushion usingthe armrest in the door or the centerconsole, by pressing the feet on thefloor, by sitting on the edge of the seatcushion, or by pressing against thebackrest in a way that reduces pressureon the seat cushion. This could causeOWS to disable the passenger's sidefront airbag.

• Do not place any type of object on thefront passenger's seat in such a waythat jamming, pressing, or squeezingoccurs between the object and the frontseat, other than as a direct result of thecorrect use of the Automatic LockingRetractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt, see page 36.

• No objects should be placed under thefront passenger's seat. This could inter-fere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags 01

29

Side impact airbags – front seats only

G020118

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag

As an enhancement to the structural sideimpact protection built into your car, the car isalso equipped with Side Impact ProtectionSystem (SIPS) airbags.

The SIPS airbag system is designed to helpincrease occupant protection in the event ofcertain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-bags are designed to deploy only during cer-tain side-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact.

G025315

SIPS airbag deployment

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occursonly on the side of the vehicle affected bythe impact. The airbags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen-erators and side airbag modules built into theoutboard sides of both front seat backrests.

WARNING

• The SIPS airbag system is a supple-ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-tection System and the three-point seatbelt system. It is not designed to deployduring collisions from the front or rear ofthe car or in rollover situations.

• The use of seat covers on the front seatsmay impede SIPS airbag deployment.

• No objects, accessory equipment orstickers may be placed on, attached toor installed near the SIPS airbag systemor in the area affected by SIPS airbagdeployment.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the SIPS airbag system. Thisshould be done only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• In order for the SIPS airbag to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants should sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properly fastened.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the occupants of thevehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety

Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) 01

30

The Volvo Inflatable Curtain system

G007478

This system consists of inflatable curtainslocated along the sides of the roof liners,stretching from the center of both front sidewindows to the rear edge of the rear side doorwindows. It is designed to help protect theheads of the occupants of the front and rearseats in certain side impact collisions.

In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur-tain (VIC) and the Side Impact Airbag System(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The VIC and the SIPSairbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE

If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remainsinflated for approximately 3 seconds.

WARNING

• The VIC system is a supplement to theSide Impact Protection System. It is notdesigned to deploy during collisionsfrom the front or rear of the car or in roll-over situations.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the VIC system. This should bedone only by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• Never hang heavy items from the ceilinghandles. This could impede deploymentof the Inflatable curtain.

01 Safety

Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) 01

31

WARNING

In order for the VIC to provide its best pro-tection, all occupants of the vehicle shouldsit in an upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened; adults using the seat beltand children using the proper child restraintsystem. Only adults should sit in the frontseats. Children must never be allowed in thefront passenger's seat, see page 36 forguidelines. Failure to follow these instruc-tions can result in injury to the vehicle occu-pants in an accident.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

32

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only

G020347

The WHIPS system consists of speciallydesigned hinges and brackets on the front seatbackrests designed to help absorb some of theenergy generated in a collision from the rear(when the vehicle is "rearended").

In the event of a collision of this type, the hingesand brackets of the front seat backrests aredesigned to change position slightly to allowthe backrest/head restraint to help support theoccupant's head before moving slightly rear-ward. This movement helps absorb some ofthe forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

• The WHIPS system is designed to sup-plement the other safety systems inyour car. For this system to functionproperly, the three-point seat belt mustbe worn. Please be aware that no sys-tem can prevent all possible injuries thatmay occur in an accident.

• The WHIPS system is designed to func-tion in certain collisions from the rear,depending on the crash severity, angleand speed.

WARNING

• Occupants in the front seats must neversit out of position. The occupant's backmust be as upright as comfort allowsand be against the seat back with theseat belt properly fastened.

• If your car has been involved in a rear-end collision, the front seat backrestsmust be inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician, evenif the seats appear to be undamaged.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

33

Certain components in the WHIPS sys-tem may need to be replaced.

• Do not attempt to service any compo-nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

G020126

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat backr-ests and the folded rear seat could impedethe function of the WHIPS system. If the rearseat is folded down, the occupied frontseats must be adjusted forward so that theydo not touch the folded rear seat.

G020125

WARNING

• Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behindthe front seats could impede the func-tion of the WHIPS system.

• If the rear seat backrests are foldeddown, cargo must be secured to pre-vent it from sliding forward against thefront seat backrests in the event of acollision from the rear. This could inter-fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-tem.

01 Safety

Crash mode 01

34

Driving after a collision

G026363

If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL mayappear in the information display. This indi-cates that the vehicle's functionality has beenreduced.

This text can only be shown if the display isundamaged and the vehicle's electrical systemis intact.

CRASH MODE is a feature that is triggered ifone or more of the safety systems (for example,front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, orone or more of the seat belt pretensioners) hasdeployed. The collision may have damaged animportant function in the vehicle, such as the

fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety sys-tems, the brake system, etc.

WARNING

• Never attempt to repair the vehicleyourself or to reset the electrical systemafter the vehicle has displayed CRASH

MODE SEE MANUAL. This couldresult in injury or improper system func-tion.

• Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-ing mode should only be done by atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

• After CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL

has been displayed, if you detect theodor of fuel vapor, or see any signs offuel leakage, do not attempt to start thevehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.

Attempting to start the vehicle

If damage to the vehicle is minor and there isno fuel leakage, you may attempt to start thevehicle. To do so:

1. Remove the ignition key or optional keylessdrive start control, see page 148.

2. Reinsert the key or start control in the igni-tion switch. The vehicle will then attempt toreset CRASH MODE to normal mode.

3. Try to start the vehicle.

Moving the vehicle

If the electrical system is able to reset systemstatus to normal (CRASH MODE SEE

MANUAL will no longer be displayed), thevehicle may be moved carefully from its pres-ent position, if for example, it is blocking traffic.It should, however, not be moved farther thanis absolutely necessary.

WARNING

Even if the vehicle appears to be drivableafter CRASH MODE has been set, it shouldnot be driven or towed (pulled by anothervehicle). There may be concealed damagethat could make it difficult or impossible tocontrol. The vehicle should be transportedon a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

35

Children should be seated safely

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraintsystems for all occupants including children.Remember that, regardless of age and size, achild should always be properly restrained in acar.

Your car is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCHattachments, which make it more convenientto install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children aredesigned to be secured in the vehicle by lapbelts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.Such child restraint systems can help protectchildren in cars in the event of an accident onlyif they are used properly. However, childrencould be endangered in a crash if the childrestraints are not properly secured in the vehi-cle. Failure to follow the installation instructionsfor your child restraint can result in your childstriking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitablesubstitute for a child restraint system. In anaccident, a child held in a person's arms canbe crushed between the vehicle's interior andan unrestrained person. The child could also beinjured by striking the interior, or by being ejec-ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuveror impact. The same can also happen if theinfant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.Other occupants should also be properly

restrained to help reduce the chance of injuringor increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-erning how and where children should be car-ried in a car. Find out the regulations existingin your state or province. Recent accident sta-tistics have shown that children are safer in rearseating positions than front seating positionswhen properly restrained. A child restraint sys-tem can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here'swhat to look for when selecting a child restraintsystem:

• It should have a label certifying that itmeets applicable Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can-ada, CMVSS 213.

• Make sure the child restraint system isapproved for the child's height, weight anddevelopment – the label required by thestandard or regulation, or instructions forinfant restraints, typically provide this infor-mation.

• In using any child restraint system, we urgeyou to carefully look over the instructionsthat are provided with the restraint. Be sureyou understand them and can use thedevice properly and safely in this vehicle.A misused child restraint system can resultin increased injuries for both the infant orchild and other occupants in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safetyseat, you should use the rear seat with thestandard seat belt fastened. The best way tohelp protect the child here is to place the childon a cushion so that the seat belt is properlylocated on the hips (see the illustration on page43). Legislation in your state or province maymandate the use of a child seat or cushion incombination with the seat belt, depending onthe child's age and/or size. Please check localregulations.

A specially designed and tested booster cush-ion can be obtained from your Volvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33–80 lbs. (15–36 kg) and 38–54 inches (97–137 cm) in height

Canada: for children weighing 40–80 lbs. (18–36 kg) and 40–54 inches (102–137 cm) in height

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommend thatchildren under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) inheight who have outgrown these devices sitin the rear seat with the seat belt fastened.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

36

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, eachseat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-ped with a locking mechanism to help keep theseat belt taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child

seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seataccording to the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into thebuckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut aroundthe child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will beaudible at this time and is normal. The belt willnow be locked in place. This function is auto-matically disabled when the seat belt isunlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommend thatchildren who have outgrown these devicessit in the rear seat with the seat belt properlyfastened.

Volvo's recommendations

Why does Volvo believe that no child should sitin the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really.A front airbag is a very powerful devicedesigned, by law, to help protect an adult.

Because of the size of the airbag and its speedof inflation, a child should never be placed inthe front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvohas been an innovator in safety for over sev-enty-five years, and we'll continue to do ourpart. But we need your help. Please rememberto put your children in the back seat, andbuckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific

recommendations:

• Always wear your seat belt.

• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safetydevice which, when used with a three-point seat belt can help reduce seriousinjuries during certain types of accidents.

Volvo recommends that you do not dis-connect the airbag system in your vehicle.

• Volvo strongly recommends that everyonein the vehicle be properly restrained.

• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the backseat of any vehicle with a front passengerside airbag.

• Drive safely!

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

��

37

Child restraints

G026319

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraintsystems: infant seats, convertible seats, andbooster cushions. They are classified accord-ing to the child's age and size.

The following section provides general infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using athree-point seat belt. Refer to pages pages44–45 for information on securing a childrestraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/ortop tether anchorages.

G026320

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if thePassenger airbag off symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to cause theairbag to inflate, this could lead to seriousinjury or death to a child seated in this posi-tion.

G026321

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-turer's instructions for detailed informationon securing the restraint.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

38

WARNING

• When not in use, keep the child restraintsystem secured or remove it from thepassenger compartment to help pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or collision.

• A small child's head represents a con-siderable part of its total weight and itsneck is still very weak. Volvo recom-mends that children up to age 4 travel,properly restrained, facing rearward. Inaddition, Volvo recommends that chil-dren should ride rearward facing, prop-erly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

��

39

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G026417

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-er's seat

NOTE

Refer to pages 44–45 for information onsecuring a child restraint using ISOFIX loweranchors and/or top tether anchorages.

WARNING

• An infant seat must be in the rear-facingposition only.

• The infant seat should not be positionedbehind the driver's seat unless there isadequate space for safe installation.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of thevehicle.

G026322

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

G026323

Fasten the seat belt

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to cause theairbag to inflate, this could lead to seriousinjury or death to a child seated in this posi-tion.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latchplate into the buckle (lock) until a distinctclick is audible.

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

40

G026324

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let theseat belt retract and pull it taut. A soundfrom the seat belt retractor's automaticlocking function will be audible at this time

and is normal. The seat belt should now belocked in place.

G026325

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in anydirection.

6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure thatit is held securely in place by the seat belt.

7. The infant seat can be removed by unbuck-ling the seat belt and letting it retract com-pletely.

01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

��

41

Securing a convertible seat with a seatbelt

G026420

Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-senger's seat

NOTE

Refer to pages 44–45 for information onsecuring a child restraint using ISOFIX loweranchors and/or top tether anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-ward or rearward-facing position, dependingon the age and size of the child.

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-ble for the child's age and size. See the con-vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda-tions.

G026320

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

A small child's head represents a consider-able part of its total weight and its neck isstill very weak. Volvo recommends that chil-dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained,facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recom-mends that children should ride rearwardfacing, properly restrained, as long as pos-sible.

WARNING

• Convertible child seats should be instal-led in the rear seat only.

• A rear-facing convertible seat should notbe positioned behind the driver's seatunless there is adequate space for safeinstallation.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seatof the vehicle.

01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

42

G026326

Fasten the seat belt

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.


4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. Asound from the seat belt retractor's auto-matic locking function will be audible at thistime and is normal. The seat belt shouldnow be locked in place.

G026327

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat toensure that it is held securely in place bythe seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in anydirection.

The convertible seat can be removed byunbuckling the seat belt and letting it retractcompletely.

G026328

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

43

Securing a booster cushion

G026314

Position the child correctly on the booster cushionand fasten the seat belt

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if thePassenger airbag off symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to cause theairbag to inflate, this could lead to seriousinjury or death to a child seated in this posi-tion.

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-dren who have outgrown convertible seats.

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seatof the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on thebooster cushion, attach the seat belt to oraround the cushion according to the man-ufacturer's instructions.


4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut andfits snugly around the child.

WARNING

• The hip section of the three-point seatbelt must fit snugly across the child'ships, not across the stomach.

• The shoulder section of the three-pointseat belt should be positioned acrossthe chest and shoulder.

• The shoulder belt must never be placedbehind the child's back or under thearm.

01 Safety

ISOFIX lower anchors 01

44

Using the ISOFIX lower child seatanchors

G009182

Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped childseats are located in both rear seating positions,hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbolson the seat back upholstery mark the anchorpositions (see the illustration).

To access the anchors:

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press downthe seat cushion and locate the anchors byfeel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the childrestraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX loweranchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat strapsaccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

NOTE

• Always follow your child seat manufac-turer's installation instructions, and useboth ISOFIX lower anchors and toptethers whenever possible.

WARNING

• The ISOFIX lower child restraintanchors are only intended for use withchild seats positioned in the left or rightseating positions.

G031682

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIXlower anchors

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the attachment correctlyto the anchor (see the illustration). If theattachment is not correctly fastened, thechild restraint may not be properly securedin the event of a collision.

01 Safety

Top tether anchors 01

45

Top tether anchors

G015718

Top tether anchorage points

Volvo vehicles are equipped with child restrainttop tether anchorages in the rear seating posi-tions. They are located on the rear sides of thebackrests.

Using the top tether anchorages

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

2. Attach the hook to the anchorage.

G015719

Route the strap under the head restraint

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the child tether attachmentcorrectly to the anchor. If it is not correctlyfastened, the child seat may not be properlyrestrained in the event of a collision.

3. Route the top tether strap under the headrestraint and fasten its attachment to theanchorage.

4. Firmly tension the top tether strap accord-ing to the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Tension the top tether straponly after the lower anchor straps or theseat belt have been firmly tensioned.

See page 44 for information on securing thechild restraint to ISOFIX lower anchors.

WARNING

• Never route a top tether strap over thetop or around the head restraint. Itshould always be routed under the headrestraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposedby correctly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstances are they to be usedfor adult seat belts or harnesses. Theanchorages are not able to withstandexcessive forces on them in the event ofcollision if full harness seat belts or adultseat belts are installed to them. An adultwho uses a belt anchored in a childrestraint anchorage runs a great risk ofsuffering severe injuries should a colli-sion occur.

• Do not install rear speakers that requirethe removal of the top tether anchors orinterfere with the proper use of the toptether strap.

01 Safety

Child restraint registration and recalls 01

46

Registering a child restraint

Child restraints could be recalled for safetyreasons. You must register your child restraintto be reached in a recall. To stay informedabout child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill outand return the registration card that comeswith new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily avail-able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recallinformation in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.In Canada, visit Transport Canada's ChildSafety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

01 Safety

01

47

G020901


Instrument overview................................................................................ 50Instrument panel..................................................................................... 53Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 55Symbols – instrument panel.................................................................... 57Information display.................................................................................. 6012-volt sockets....................................................................................... 62Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 63Left-side steering wheel lever................................................................. 65Trip computer.......................................................................................... 67Cruise control*........................................................................................ 69Right-side steering wheel lever............................................................... 71Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers............................. 74Parking brake.......................................................................................... 75Power windows....................................................................................... 76Mirrors..................................................................................................... 77Power moonroof*.................................................................................... 80Personal settings.................................................................................... 82HomeLink® Wireless Control System*................................................... 85

02INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS


Instrument overview

02

50

G019492


Instrument overview

02

��


Steering wheel adjustment

Hood opener

Controls in front doors

Left steering wheel lever

Lighting panel, fuel filler door opener

Door open handle and locking button

Climate system air vent

Side window air vent

Cruise control

Horn, airbag

Main instrument panel

Audio controls

Right steering wheel lever

Ignition switch

Moonroof control*

Not in use

Not is use

Courtesy lighting switch

Driver's side reading light

Passenger's side reading light

Seat belt reminder and OccupantWeight Sensor indicator

Rear-view mirror

Display for climate control, personalsettings, and audio system

Audio system

Controls for personal settings andaudio system

Controls for climate system

Gear selector

Hazard warning flashers

Door open handle, and locking button

Glove compartment

Parking brake

12-volt socket

Position for optional equipment

Position for optional equipment


Instrument overview

02

52

Control panel in driver's door

G017449

Power windows

Door mirror button, driver's side

Door mirror adjustment control

Door mirror button, passenger's side


Instrument panel

02

��

53

Instrument panel

8 9 11 12 13 1410 G03

1465

432 5 6 71

Speedometer

Turn signal, left

Warning symbol – See the following pagesfor additional information.

Information display – The display presentsinformation and warning messages, theambient temperature, clock, etc. When theambient temperature is between 23 °F and36 °F (–5 °C and +2 °C), a snowflake sym-bol is shown in the display. This symbolserves as a warning for possible slipperyroad surfaces. Please note that this symboldoes not indicate a fault with your car. Atlow speeds, or when the car is not moving,

the temperature readings may be slightlyhigher than the actual ambient tempera-ture.

Information symbol – See the followingpages for additional information.

Turn signal, right

Tachometer – Shows engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).Do not drive continuously with the needlein the red area of the dial, which indicatesmaximum allowable engine rpm range.Instead, shift to a higher gear or slow thevehicle down. The engine managementsystem will automatically prevent exces-

sively high engines speeds. This will benoticeable as a pronounced unevenness inengine speed.

Indicator and information symbols

Fuel gauge, see page 267 for fuel tank vol-ume. When a warning light in the gaugecomes on, the vehicle should be refueledas soon as possible, see page 67 formore information on fuel level and con-sumption in the "Trip computer” section.

High beam indicator

Function display – This window displaysinformation on functions such as the


Instrument panel

02

54

odometer, trip odometers, optional rainsensor, and cruise control.

Trip odometer reset button – The tripodometers are used to measure short dis-tances. Press the button briefly to switchbetween the odometer for the car's totalmileage and the two trip odometers, T1and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds)resets the currently selected trip odometer.

Temperature gauge – The gauge indicatesthe temperature of the engine cooling sys-tem. If the temperature is abnormally highand the needle enters the red zone, a mes-sage is shown in the display. Bear in mindthat auxiliary lamps in front of the air intakereduce the cooling capacity at high outsidetemperatures and high engine loads.

Indicator and warning symbols



02

��

55

Function check

The indicator and warning symbols1 light upwhen you turn the ignition key or the optionalkeyless drive start control to the driving posi-tion (position II) before starting. This shows thatthe symbols are functioning.

When the engine starts, all sym-bols go out. If the engine is notstarted within 5 seconds, all of thesymbols except the malfunctionindicator light (CHECK ENGINE)and the oil pressure warning lightwill go out. Certain symbols may

not have their functions illustrated, dependingon the car's equipment.

The PARK BRAKE symbol will not go out untilthe parking brake has been released.

Symbols in the center of the instrumentpanel

G026365

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights upto indicate a fault that could affectthe car's drivability.This symbolilluminates when the vehicle istraveling at speeds above 5 mph

(7 km/h). A text explaining the nature of the faultwill also be shown in the information display.The symbol and accompanying text will remainon until the fault has been corrected. This sym-bol may also light up in combination with otherindicator or warning symbols.

If the red warning symbol lights up:

1. Stop the car as soon as possible in a suit-able location.

2. Read the message in the information dis-play.

3. Follow the instructions provided, or con-tact a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician. Erase the message by pressingREAD, see page 60.

Information symbol

The yellow information symbollights up to alert the driver to amessage in the information dis-play. This symbol illuminates whenthe vehicle is traveling at speeds

below 5 mph (7 km/h).

The message can be erased by pressing theREAD button, see page 60, or will disappearautomatically (the length of time required forthe message to disappear varies, dependingon the function indicated).

When the message "TIME FOR REGULAR

SERVICE" is displayed, the text can be erasedand the information symbol light can be turnedoff by pressing the READ button. The text willdisappear and the symbol light will go out auto-matically after two minutes.

1 On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 212.



02

56

This symbol may also light up in combinationwith other indicator or warning symbols.

NOTE

The car can still be driven after the informa-tion symbol has come on. The car can bedriven for 1–2 weeks after service-relatedinformation has been displayed.


Symbols – instrument panel

02

��

57

Symbols – left side

G026439

1. Malfunction indicator light

As you drive, a computer calledOn-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII)monitors your car's engine, trans-mission, electrical and emissionsystems.

The CHECK ENGINE light will light up if thecomputer senses a condition that potentiallymay need correcting. When this happens,please have your car checked by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician as soon aspossible.

A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau-ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a changein your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrectedcondition could hurt fuel economy, emissioncontrols, and drivability. Extended driving with-out correcting the cause could even damageother components in your car.

NOTE

Canadian models are equipped with thesecond symbol.

2. Anti-lock Brake system (ABS)

If the warning light comes on, thereis a malfunction of the ABS system(the standard braking system willstill function).

The vehicle should be driven to atrained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician for inspection, seepage 153 for additional informa-tion.

NOTE


3. Rear fog light

This symbol indicates that the rearfog light (located in the driver'sside taillight cluster) is on.

4. Stability system DSTC

This indicator symbol flashes whenthe DSTC (Dynamic Stability andTraction control system) is activelyworking to stabilize the car, seepage 155 for more detailed infor-

mation.

5. Tire Pressure Monitoring System

This system monitors inflationpressure in the tires. See page193 for more information.

6. Fuel level warning light

When this light comes on, the vehi-cle should be refueled as soon aspossible.



02

58

Symbols – right side

G026438

1. Turn signal indicator for trailer (not

C30)

2. Parking brake applied

This light is on when the parkingbrake (hand brake) is applied. Theparking brake lever is situatedbetween the front seats, seepage 75 for more information.

NOTE


3. SRS system warning light

If this light comes on while the caris being driven, or remains on forlonger than approximately 10 sec-onds after the car has beenstarted, the SRS system's diag-

nostic functions have detected a fault in a seatbelt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, sideimpact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.Have the system(s) inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician as soon aspossible.

4. Oil pressure warning light1

If the light comes on while driving,the car, stop the engine immedi-ately, and check the engine oillevel. If the oil level is normal andthe light stays on after restart, have

the car towed to the nearest trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician. After hard driv-ing, the light may come on occasionally whenthe engine is idling. This is normal, provided itgoes off when the engine speed is increased.

5. Seat belt reminder

This symbol (and the seat beltreminder light above the rear viewmirror) will light up if either frontseat occupant has not buckled his/her seat belt. If the car is not mov-

ing, the symbols will go out after approximately6 seconds.

6. Generator warning light

If the light comes on while theengine is running, have the charg-ing system checked by an author-ized Volvo workshop.

7. Brake failure warning light

If this light comes on while drivingor braking, stop the car as quicklyas possible in a safe place, openthe hood, and check the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir, seepage 211 for the location of thereservoir.

NOTE


1 On certain engines, this symbol is not used to indicate low oil pressure. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see also page 212.



02

59

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in thereservoir or if a Brake failure – Serviceurgent message is displayed in the infor-mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have thecar towed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brake sys-tem inspected.

If the BRAKES and ABS warning lights comeon at the same time, this could indicate a faultin the brake system.

In this case:

1. Stop the car in a suitable place and switchoff the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If both warning lights go off, no furtheraction is required and the car can bedriven.

4. If both lights remain on after the engine hasbeen restarted, switch off the engine againand check the brake fluid level, seepage 211 for the location of the reservoir.

Door open warning

The driver will be alerted if one of the doors, thehood or the liftgate are open or ajar.

At low speeds

If the car is moving at a speed ofless than approximately 3 mph(5 km/h), the Information symbol inthe instrument panel will light upand a message will be shown in the

information display indicating which door(s),etc is not completely closed.

At higher speeds

If the car is moving at a speedabove approximately 6 mph(10 km/h), the Warning symbol inthe instrument panel will light upand a message will be shown in the

information display indicating which door(s),etc is not completely closed.

Hood and liftgate

If the hood and/or liftgate is notcompletely closed, the Informationsymbol in the instrument panel willlight up and a message will be dis-played, regardless of the vehicle's

speed.


Information display

02

60

Messages

G019617

When an indicator or warning light in the instru-ment panel comes on, a message is alsoshown in the information display. To read amessage:

1. Press the READ button (1).

2. Pressing READ repeatedly enables you toscroll to any other messages that may bestored.

NOTE

If a message is displayed when e.g. you areusing the trip computer, this message mustbe read before you can access the trip com-puter.

Message Meaning

STOP SAFELYA Stop the vehicle in asafe place and switchoff the engine to helpprevent the risk of seri-ous damage.

HIGH ENGINE

TEMP STOP

SAFELY

Stop the vehicle in asafe place and switchoff the engine to helpprevent the risk of seri-ous damage.

SERVICE

URGENTATake your car to atrained and qualifiedVolvo service techni-cian for inspectionimmediately.

SEE MANUALA Refer to your owner'smanual. For additionalinformation, pleasecontact your Volvoretailer.

Message Meaning

SERVICE

REQUIREDATake your car to atrained and qualifiedVolvo service techni-cian for inspection assoon as possible (butpreferably before thenext scheduled mainte-nance service).

BOOK TIME

FOR SERVICE

Book time for service atan authorized Volvoworkshop.

TIME FOR

REGULAR

MAINTE-

NANCE

This message is affec-ted by the number ofmiles/km driven, by thenumber of months, orby the number of enginehours since the servicereminder was reset atthe most recent regu-larly scheduled service.

MAINTE-

NANCE OVER-

DUE

If the vehicle is not serv-iced according toschedule, the warrantymay not apply to dam-aged parts, etc.


Information display

02

61

Message Meaning

TIME FOR

REGULAR

MAINTE-

NANCE

This message is affec-ted by the number ofmiles/km driven, by thenumber of months, orby the number of enginehours since the servicereminder was reset atthe most recent regu-larly scheduled service.

REMINDER

CHECK OIL

LEVEL

Stop as soon as possi-ble and switch off theengine, check the oillevel and top up if nec-essary, see page 212.

A This is part of the message. Additional information will alsobe displayed.


12-volt sockets

02

62

12-volt socket (front seat)

G026349

12-volt socket, auxiliary equipment

The 12-volt socket can be used to plug in cer-tain accessories such as cellular telephones,etc. The maximum current is 10 A. The keymust be in position I (or higher) for the auxiliarysocket to function.

Ashtrays/cigarette lighter

The auxiliary socket can also be used for a cig-arette lighter1, and ashtrays, which can be pur-chased from your Volvo retailer.

NOTE

The cover should be kept on when the aux-iliary socket is not in use.

Auxiliary equipment

The buttons to the left of the 12-volt socket canbe used for Volvo-installed optional or auxiliaryequipment.

12-volt socket (rear seat)

G029082

NOTE

The 12-volt socket in the rear seat cannotfunction as a cigarette lighter.

1 Accessory.


Lighting panel

02

��


Parking lights

G026415

Light switch

Thumb wheel for adjusting brightness ofinstrument lighting

Daytime running lights

To unlock the fuel filler door

Rear fog light

Pos. Lighting

All lighting off. Low beam head-lights (daytime running lights)will automatically come on if theignition key is in position II.Front and rear parking lightsand license plate lights will alsobe on. High beams can bebriefly flashed. The headlightsswitch off automatically whenthe ignition key is removed.

Parking lights

Daytime running lights. Highbeams and high beam flash canbe used in this position.

The front and rear parking lights can be turnedon even when the ignition is switched off.

� Turn switch (1) to the parking light position.

The license plate lights also illuminate when theparking lights are switched on.

Headlights

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. The low beam headlights (daytime runninglights) illuminate automatically, exceptwhen the light switch (1) is in the parkinglight position1.

NOTE

See page 65 for information on switchingbetween high and low beams.

Brake lights

The brake lights come on automatically whenthe brakes are applied.

Fog lights

Front fog lights*

The front fog lights can be used in combinationwith either the headlights or the parking lights.


2. Press button (3) to turn on the front foglights.

An indicator light in the button illuminates whenthe front fog lights are on.

1 On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.


Lighting panel

02

64

Rear fog light

The single rear fog light is located in the driver'sside taillight cluster.

The rear fog light will only function in combi-nation with the high/low beam headlights or theoptional front fog lights.


2. Press button (5) to turn on the rear fog light.

An indicator light in the button illuminates whenthe rear fog light is on.

NOTE

The rear fog light is considerably brighterthan the normal taillights and should beused only when conditions such as fog, rain,snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility forother vehicles to less than 500 ft.(150 meters).

Instrument panel lighting

The instrument panel lighting illuminates whenthe ignition is in position II and the lightswitch (1) is in either position or .

NOTE

To make it easier to read the odometer, tripodometer, clock, and ambient temperature,these gauges illuminate when the vehicle isunlocked and when the key has beenremoved from the ignition switch. The light-ing will go out when the vehicle is locked.

Move the thumb wheel (2) up to increasebrightness or down to decrease brightness.

Unlocking the fuel filler door

With the ignition switched off, press button (4)to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note thatthe fuel filler door will remain unlocked until thecar begins to move forward.

An audible click will be heard when the fuel fillerdoor re-locks.


Left-side steering wheel lever

02

��

65

Lever positions

G026954

Turn signals, lane change position

Turn signals, position for normal turns

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams,Home Safe lighting

Turn signals

When turning

� Move the lever as far up or down as pos-sible (to position 2) to start the turn signals.

The turn signals will be cancelled automaticallyby the movement of the steering wheel, or thelever can be returned to its initial position byhand.

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn sig-nals 3 times by:

• Moving the turn signal lever up or down toposition 1 and releasing it.

• Moving the lever up or down to position 2and immediately back to its original posi-tion.

NOTE

• This automatic flashing sequence canbe interrupted by immediately movingthe lever in the opposite direction.

• If the turn signal indicator flashes fasterthan normal, check for a burned-outturn signal bulb.

High/low beam headlights

Continuous high beams


2. With the light switch (1) in position ,see page 63, pull the turn signal levertoward the steering wheel (position 4) totoggle between high and low beams.

High beam flash


2. Pull the turn signal lever to position 3. Thehigh beams will remain on until the lever isreleased.

Home safe lighting

When you leave your car at night, you canmake use of the home safe lighting function toilluminate the area in front of the car.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far aspossible towards the steering wheel (toposition 4) and release it.

3. Exit the car and lock the doors.

The headlights and parking lights will illuminateand remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. Thetime interval can be changed according to your

1 Factory setting.


Left-side steering wheel lever

02

66

preferences by using the Personal Settingsfunction, see page 82 for more information.


Trip computer

02

��

67

G029052

READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/erase a message)

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the tripcomputer menus)

RESET

The trip computer stores information gatheredfrom several systems in your car and has fourmenus (five on Canadian models) that can beshown in the information display.

• MILES TO EMPTY TANK

• AVERAGE (average fuel consumption)

• INSTANTANEOUS (current fuel con-sumption)

• AVERAGE SPEED

• ACTUAL SPEED (current speed in mph,Canadian models only)

• DSTC, see page 155

NOTE

Warning messages from the car's monitor-ing systems will override the trip computerfunction.

If a warning message is shown in the informa-tion display while you are using the trip com-puter:

1. Acknowledge the message by pressing theREAD (button 1).

2. Press READ again to return to the tripcomputer function.

Controls

The trip computer functions can be accessedby twisting the thumb wheel (2) one step at atime in either direction. Twisting a final timereturns you to the original function.

Resetting

AVERAGE (average fuel consumption) andAVERAGE SPEED can be reset.

1. Select one of these functions.

2. Press RESET (3).

MILES TO EMPTY TANK

This function shows the approximate distancethat can be driven on the fuel remaining in thetank. The calculation is based on average fuelconsumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)of driving and the amount of fuel remaining inthe tank when the reading was taken.

When the message ---- miles to empty tank

appears in the display, refuel as soon as pos-sible.

AVERAGE

This value indicates fuel consumption since thelast time the trip computer was reset, by press-ing RESET (button 3). When the engine isswitched off, information on fuel consumptionis stored and remains in system memory untilRESET (button 3) is pressed again.

INSTANTANEOUS

This value indicates the current fuel consump-tion, based on readings taken once per sec-ond. When the car is not moving, "----" will bedisplayed.

AVERAGE SPEED

This value indicates average speed since thelast time the trip computer was reset, by press-ing RESET (button 3). When the engine isswitched off, information on average speed isstored and remains in system memory until theRESET (button 3) is pressed again.


Trip computer

02

68

ACTUAL SPEED (Canadian models only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-taneous conversion of the car's current speedfrom km/h to mph.

NOTE

Trip computer readings may vary slightlydepending on the circumference of the tireson the car, tire inflation, or driving style.


Cruise control*

02

��


Engaging the cruise control function

G020141

The cruise control buttons are located on theleft side of the steering wheel hub.

NOTE

This does not set the vehicle's speed.

1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE willappear in the function display in the centerof the instrument panel.

2. Press + or – to set the current speed.CRUISE ON will be displayed.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G031667

Use + or – in the following ways to increase ordecrease the vehicle's speed:

1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehiclereaches the desired speed. This willbecome the set speed when the button isreleased.

2. Press + or – for approximately a half sec-ond and release the button to increase ordecrease vehicle speed by approximately1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

• Cruise control will not function atspeeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Momentary acceleration, for less than1 minute (e.g. when passing anothercar), does not affect cruise control oper-ation. The car will automatically returnto the previously set speed when theaccelerator pedal is released.

Temporarily disengaging the cruisecontrol

• Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruisecontrol.

CRUISE will appear in the function display.The currently set speed is stored in the sys-tem's memory.

Cruise control is also automaticallydisengaged:

• If the speed drops below approximately20 mph (30 km/h) when driving uphill.

• When the brake or clutch pedal isdepressed.

• If the gear selector is moved to posi-tion N.


Cruise control*

02


• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

• If the vehicle's speed is increased by usingthe accelerator pedal for more than1 minute.

Returning to the set speed

Press the button to resume thepreviously set speed. CRUISE

ON will be displayed.

Disengaging cruise control

Cruise control can also be disengaged by:

• Pressing the CRUISE button (CRUISE

ON will no longer be shown in the functiondisplay).

• Putting the gear selector in Neutral (N).

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavytraffic or when driving on wet or slipperyroads. Cruise control may not maintain setspeed on steep downgrades.


Right-side steering wheel lever

02

��

71

Windshield wipers

0

0

A

C DB

G025411

Windshield/headlight washers

Rain sensor – on/of, see page 71

Thumb wheel

Liftgate wiper/washer

Windshield wipers off

The windshield wipers are off whenthe lever is in position 0.

Manual wiper function

From position 0, move the leverupward. The windshield wipers willsweep one stroke at a time for aslong as the lever is held up.

Intermittent wiper function

With the lever in this position, youcan set the wiper interval by mov-ing the thumb wheel (C) upward toincrease wiper speed or down-ward to decrease the speed.

Continuous wiper function

The wipers operate at "normal"speed.

High speed wiper function.

– Windshield washers

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel andrelease it. The wipers will make 2–3 sweepsacross the windshield after the lever has beenreleased.

CAUTION

• Use ample washer fluid when washingthe windshield. The windshield shouldbe thoroughly wet when the wipers arein operation.

• Before using the wipers, ice and snowshould be removed from the wind-shield/rear window. Be sure the wiperblades are not frozen in place.

Headlight washers (certain models)

When the lever has been pulled, high pressurejets mounted in the bumper will spray the head-lights.

The following applies to conserve washer fluid,see page 63 for information on the light switchpositions:

Low/high beam headlights on

The headlights will be washed the first time thewindshield is washed. Thereafter, the head-lights will only be washed once for every fivetimes the windshield is washed within a10 minute period.

Parking lights on

Optional Dual Xenon headlights will be washedonce for every five times the windshield iswashed.

Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.



02


– Rain sensor*

G031469

The rain sensor regulates windshield wiperspeed according to the amount of water on thewindshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor isadjusted by moving the thumb wheel (C in theillustration on the previous page) up (the wiperswill sweep the windshield more frequently) ordown (the wipers will sweep the windshieldless frequently).

On/Off

Activating the rain sensor

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Put the windshield wiper lever in posi-tion 0.

3. Press button B (see page 71). The rain sen-sor symbol will appear in the lower display.

Manual deactivation

The rain sensor can be deactivated by:

Pressing button (B).

or

Moving the windshield wiper lever down.

NOTE

The rain sensor function will remain acti-vated if the lever is briefly moved up to acti-vate the "manual sweep" function.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated whenwashing the car in an automatic car wash,etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, thewipers will start inadvertently in the carwash and could be damaged.

Automatic deactivation

The rain sensor is deactivated automatically inthe following situations:

• When the key is removed from the ignition.

• Five minutes after the ignition is switchedoff if the key is left in the ignition.

– Thumb wheel

The thumb wheel is used to set the wiper inter-val when intermittent wiping is selected, or thesensitivity to the amount of rain on the wind-shield when the rain sensor is selected. Movethe wheel upward or downward to increase/decrease wiper speed when the intermittentfunction is selected, or to increase/decreasethe optional rain sensor's sensitivity when thethis function is activated.

– Liftgate wiper/washer

Press the lever forward to wipe and wash theliftgate window. The wiper will sweep the win-dow several times after the lever has beenreleased.

The button at the end of the lever has threepositions:

• Intermittent wiping: Press in the upper sec-tion of the button.

• Normal wiper speed: Press in the lowersection of the button.

• Neutral position: The wiper function isswitched off.



02

73

Liftgate wiper and reverse gear

• If the front wipers are on and the transmis-sion is put into reverse gear, the liftgatewiper will be activated.

• If the transmission is in reverse and themanual windshield wiper function is used(the lever is pushed upward), the liftgatewiper will also be activated for as long thelever is held up.

• If the liftgate wiper is already in normal wip-ing function, the normal wiping function willcontinue.


Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers

02

74

Steering wheel adjustment

G027308

Both the height and the reach of the steeringwheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi-tion for the driver.

1. Pull down the lever on the steering columnto release the steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitableposition.

3. Press the lever back into place to lock thesteering wheel in the new position. If nec-essary, press the steering wheel slightlywhile pressing the lever into the lockedposition.

Check that the steering wheel is locked in thenew position.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-ing.

Hazard warning flashers

G020144

The four-way flasher should be used to indi-cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz-ard.

1. Press the triangular button in the centerdash.

2. Press the button again to turn off the flash-ers.

NOTE

• Regulations regarding the use of thehazard warning flasher may vary,depending on where you live.

• The hazard warning flashers will be acti-vated automatically if an airbagdeploys.


Parking brake

02

75

Parking brake (hand brake)

G026348

The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats.

NOTE

The indicator light will illuminate even if theparking brake has only been partiallyapplied.

When applying the parking brake


2. Pull the parking brake lever up firmly to itsfull extent.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure thatthe vehicle is at a standstill.

4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake levermust be pulled more firmly.

5. When parking a vehicle always put the gearselector in first gear (for manual transmis-sion) or P (for automatic transmission).

Parking on a hill

• If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the frontwheels so that they point away from thecurb.

• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn thefront wheels so that they point toward thecurb.

Releasing the parking brake


2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the buttonat the end of the lever and lower the levercompletely.

WARNING

Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly toits full extent.


Power windows

02

76

Operation

G018240

Control panel in driver's door

Power window controls

The power windows are controlled by buttonsin the arm rests.

• The ignition must be ON (ignition key inposition I, II or the engine running) for thepower windows to function.

• The power windows will also function afterthe ignition has been switched off as longas neither of the front doors has beenopened.

Opening a window

Lightly press down the front edge of either ofthe buttons (A) to the first detent ("stop") toopen a window to the position of your choice.

WARNING

• Always remove the ignition key whenthe vehicle is unattended.

• Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

• Make sure that the windows are com-pletely unobstructed before they areoperated.

1. Press the front part of any of the buttons(A) as far down as possible and release toautomatically open the window com-pletely.

2. To stop the window at any time, pull thebutton up.

Closing a window

1. Lightly pull up the front edge of any of thebuttons (A) to the first detent ("stop") toclose a window to the position of yourchoice.

2. Pull the front part of any of the buttons (A)up as far as possible and release to auto-matically close the window completely. To

stop the window at any time, press thebutton down.

Power window control – frontpassenger's side

G019511

The control for the power window in the frontpassenger's door operates that window only.


Mirrors

02

��


Rearview mirror

Day/night control

Normal position

Night position, reduces glare from follow-ing traffic

Night position

To reduce glare from the headlights of follow-ing vehicles, use control (1) to switch betweenthe normal and night-driving positions.

Auto-dim function*

An optional integrated sensor reacts to head-lights from following traffic and automaticallyreduces glare.

Rearview mirror with compass*

G029930

The upper right-hand corner of the rearviewmirror has an integrated display that shows thecompass direction toward which the car ispointing. Eight different directions can be dis-played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. Thedisplay shows your car's orientation withrespect to true north.

Calibrating the compass

G031045

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The compass is initially set for the zone towhich the car was delivered, and shouldalways be adjusted if the car is driven to a newmagnetic zone. A "C" will be displayed if cali-bration becomes necessary.

To calibrate the compass:

1. Stop the car in a large, open area, awayfrom traffic.

2. Using a pen or similar object, hold the but-ton (1) depressed for at least 6 sec-onds. "C" will be displayed.


Mirrors

02


G026409

Magnetic zones

3. Press button (1) for at least 3 seconds todisplay the number of the current magneticzone.

4. Press button (1) repeatedly until the num-ber for the required geographical area (1–15) is displayed. "C" will be displayedagain.

5. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speedof 6 mph (10 km/h) until a compass direc-tion is displayed.

Calibration is complete.

Power door mirrors

G018250

The mirror control switches are located on thedriver's door armrest.

Adjusting the mirrors

WARNING

• The mirrors should always be adjustedprior to driving.

• Objects seen in the passenger's sidewide-angle door mirror are closer thanthey appear to be.

Driver's door mirror:

� Press the L button (a light in the switch willgo on) to activate the adjustment control.

Use this control to adjust the driver's doormirror.

Passenger's door mirror:

1. Press the R switch (a light in the switch willgo on) to activate the adjustment control.Use this control to adjust the passenger'sdoor mirror.

2. After you have adjusted the mirror(s), pressthe L or R switch again (the LED will go out)to deactivate the adjustment control.

Storing the mirrors' position

The position of the door mirrors is stored whenthe vehicle is locked. The next time the driver'sdoor is unlocked with the same remote key andthat door is opened within 2 minutes, theoptional power driver's seat and side door mir-rors will automatically move to the position thatthey were in when the doors were mostrecently locked with the same remote key.

Folding power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be folded in for parking/drivingin narrow spaces.

Folding the mirrors in

1. Press down the L and R mirror control but-tons on the driver's door at the same time.

2. Release them after approximately one sec-ond. The mirrors automatically fold in to thefully retracted position.


Mirrors

02


Folding the mirrors out

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the Land R buttons at the same time. The mirrorsautomatically fold out to the fully extendedposition.

Automatic folding

When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with theremote key or with the optional keyless drivesystem (see page 127), the power door mirrorswith automatically fold in or out.

NOTE

The door mirrors will not fold out automati-cally when the vehicle is unlocked if theywere folded in using the buttons on the driv-er's door control panel.

This function can be activated/deactivated inPersonal settings (see page 82). In the menusystem, go to Car settings Fold mirr. when

locking.

Return to "neutral" position

If a mirror has been inadvertently moved (bum-ped in a parking lot, etc.) from its original (neu-tral) position, it must be moved back to thisposition before automatic folding will functionagain.

To do so:

1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L andR mirror control buttons on the driver'sdoor at the same time.

2. Fold them out again by pressing the L andR mirror control buttons.

This returns the mirrors to their original (neutral)positions.

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is aninformation system that indicates the presenceof another vehicle in the side-view mirror's"blind area." See page 161 for detailed infor-mation.


Power moonroof*

02


Operating the moonroof

G007503

To operate the moonroof, the ignition key mustfirst be turned to the intermediate or drive posi-tion (position I, II or the engine running). Themoonroof can be opened in two ways:

Tilt position

Sliding moonroof

G029222

Moonroof control in the ceiling console

Auto open

Manual open

Manual close

Auto close

Tilt open

Tilt close

Tilt position

� Open: Press the rear edge of the controlupward to position 5.

� Close: Pull the rear edge of the controldown to position 6.

Sliding moonroof

Auto open/close

Open: Pull the switch as far back as possible(to position 1) and release it to automaticallyslide open the moonroof.

Close: Push the switch as far forward as pos-sible (to position 4) and release it to automati-cally close the moonroof.

Manual open/close

Open: Pull the switch back to the first stop(position 2) and hold it until the moonroof hasopened to the position of your choice.

Close: Push the switch forward to the first stop(position 3) and hold it until the moonroof hasclosed to the position of your choice, or hasclosed completely.

NOTE

If the moonroof is repeatedly obstructedduring auto-close operation, an overloadcircuit breaker will temporarily halt moon-roof function. The moonroof will return tonormal function after a brief cool-downperiod.


Power moonroof*

02


CAUTION

• Remove ice and snow before openingthe moonroof.

• Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-zen closed.

• Never place heavy objects on themoonroof.

WARNING

• If the moonroof is obstructed duringauto-close operation, it will automati-cally reverse direction and return to itsstarting position.

• During manual closing, if the moonroofis obstructed, immediately open itagain.

WARNING

• Never open or close the moonroof if it isobstructed in any way.

• Never allow a child to operate themoonroof.

• Never extend any object or body partthough the open moonroof, even if thevehicle's ignition is completelyswitched off.

• Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

Visor

G020157

The optional moonroof features a sliding visor.The visor slides open automatically when themoonroof is opened, and must be closed man-ually.


Personal settings

02

82

Control panel

A

D

B

C

EG

0263

07

Display

Menu button

Exit button

Enter button

Menu navigation controls

Personal settings can be made for some of thecar's functions, such as the central lockingsystem, climate control, and the audio system.Please refer to page 237 for more informationon the audio functions that can be adjusted.The settings are presented in the display (A).

To access the menu and adjust settings

1. Press MENU (B).

2. Scroll to Car Settings using the menu nav-igation control (E).

3. Press ENTER (D).

4. Select an alternative using the menu navi-gation control (E).

5. Confirm your selection by pressingENTER.

To exit the menu

� Press EXIT (C).

Available settings

Clock adjust

To set the time:

1. Use the number keys or the up/down arrowkeys on the navigation control (E) tochange the hour or minute.

2. Select hour(s) or minute(s) to be changedwith the left/right arrow keys.

3. Press ENTER to start the clock.

NOTE

If you are currently using the 12-hour timesetting, use the up/down arrow keys toselect AM/PM after the minute-setting hasbeen adjusted.

Lock confirmation light

When the car is locked/unlocked with theremote key, the direction indicators can beselected to flash to confirm the action. Thealternatives On/Off are available for both lock-ing and unlocking.

Autolock

When the car starts to move, the doors andliftgate can be locked automatically. The alter-natives On/Off are available.

NOTE

Pulling the handle twice on a door unlocksand opens that door.

Unlock

There are two alternatives for unlocking:


Personal settings

02

��


• Global (All doors) – unlocks all doors andthe liftgate with one press on the remotekey.

• Two Step (Two-stage unlocking) – Thisalternative unlocks the driver's door withone press on the remote key. A secondpress unlocks the passenger's door andthe liftgate.

Automatically folding the door mirrors

The setting makes it possible to automaticallyfold the door mirrors in or out when the vehicleis locked or unlocked. See page 78.

Operating side windows

The following alternative can be selected foropening the door windows at the same time bypressing and holding the Unlock switch ineither of the front doors (see page 131 foradditional information)1

NOTE

The ignition key must be in position I orhigher (see page 145) before the door win-dows can be opened using the switches inthe doors.

• Auto open all windows On/Off

Temporarily turning off the alarm

sensor(s)

The alarm sensors can be temporarily turnedoff (if, for example, a person or a pet remainsin the vehicle when the doors are locked fromoutside with the remote key). There are twoalternatives:Activate once and Ask on exit,see page 122 and 132.

Approach lighting

This alternative determines the length of timefor which the car's lights will remain on whenthe Approach light button on the central lock-ing system's remote key is pressed. Intervalsof 30/60/90 seconds may be selected, see thesection "Remote key functions" for more infor-mation.

Home safe lighting

This alternative determines the length of timefor which the car's lights will remain on whenthe high beam lever on the steering column ispulled toward the wheel with the ignitionswitched off. Intervals of 30/60/90 secondsmay be selected, see page 65 for informationon using this function.

Information

• VIN number – The VIN (Vehicle Identifica-tion Number) is the car's unique identitynumber.

• Number of Keys – the number of keys reg-istered for the car is displayed here.

Climate functions

• Blower speed in AUTO mode – the blowerspeed can be set to AUTO mode in modelsequipped with ECC. Choose between"Low", "Normal" and "High".

• Timer for recirculation – when the timer isactive, the air recirculates in the car for3–12 minutes depending on the ambienttemperature. Select On/Off depending onwhether the recirculation timer is to beactive or not.

Keyless locking and unlocking*

The following alternatives can be selected forlocking and unlocking the doors and liftgate:

• All doors – all doors are locked or unlockedat the same time.

• Doors on the same side – front and reardoors on the same side are unlockedtogether.

1 This menu alternative also makes it possible to open both door windows by pressing and holding the Unlock button on the remote key for several seconds.


Personal settings

02

84

• Both front doors – both front doors areunlocked together.

• One front door – either of the front doorscan be unlocked separately2.

Reset to factory settings

Use this alternative to return to the default cli-mate system settings.

2 Factory default.


HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

02

��


Introduction

G030070

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-vides a convenient way to replace up to threehand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices such as gate opera-tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,security systems, even home lighting. Addi-tional HomeLink information can be found onthe Internet at www.homelink.com.

WARNING

• If you use HomeLink to open a garagedoor or gate, be sure no one is near thegate or door while it is in motion.

• When programming a garage dooropener, it is advised to park outside ofthe garage.

• Do not use HomeLink with any garagedoor opener that lacks safety stop andreverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includesany garage door opener model manu-factured before April 1, 1982). A garagedoor that cannot detect an object - sig-naling the door to stop and reverse -does not meet current U.S. federalsafety standards. For more information,contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF deviceyou are programming for use in other vehiclesas well as for future HomeLink programming. Itis also suggested that upon the sale of thevehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons beerased for security purposes. Refer to “ErasingHomeLink Buttons”.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignitionswitch to be turned on or to the second(“accessories”) position for programmingand/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec-ommended that a new battery be placed inthe hand-held transmitter of the devicebeing programmed to HomeLink for quickertraining and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from theHomeLink button you wish to programwhile keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both thechosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-ter buttons until the HomeLink indicatorlight changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-ing light. Now you may release both theHomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-tons.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.



02


NOTE

Some devices may require you to replacethis Programming Step 2 with proceduresnoted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-ing light after performing these steps, con-tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-ton up to two separate times to activate thedoor. If the door does not activate, pressand hold the just-trained HomeLink buttonand observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate whenthe HomeLink button is pressed andreleased.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a con-

stant light continue with “Program-

ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-gramming of a rolling code equippeddevice (most commonly a garage dooropener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”or “smart” button. This can usually be

found where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or“smart” button. (The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer.) Thereare 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, holdfor two seconds and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the“press/hold/release” sequence a secondtime, and, depending on the brand of thegarage door opener (or other rolling codeequipped device), repeat this sequence athird time to complete the programmingprocess.

HomeLink should now activate your rollingcode equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-eral seconds of transmission – which may notbe long enough for HomeLink to pick up thesignal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-ties programming a gate operator or garagedoor opener by using the “Programming” pro-

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”

step 2 with the following:

• Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkbutton while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-tor light changes from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light. Now you may release boththe HomeLink and hand-held transmitterbuttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Activation willnow occur for the trained device (i.e., garagedoor opener, gate operator, security system,entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). Forconvenience, the hand-held transmitter of thedevice may also be used at any time. In theevent that there are still programming difficul-ties or questions, contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com.



02


Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three Home-Link buttons (individual buttons cannot beerased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlinedbelow), follow the step noted:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkbuttons until the indicator light begins toflash-after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger that 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) modeand can be programmed at any time beginningwith “Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkButton

To program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained, followthese steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-Link button, proceed with “Programming”- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLinkat: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) This device must accept anyinterference that may be received includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate thedevice.2

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

G020906


General information................................................................................. 90Air vents.................................................................................................. 92Manual climate control............................................................................ 93Electronic Climate Control (ECC)*........................................................... 96Air distribution......................................................................................... 99

03CLIMATE

03 Climate

General information

03

90

Air conditioning – A/C

Your car is equipped with a climate controlsystem that includes either manually adjusta-ble air conditioning or optional Electronic Cli-mate Control (ECC).

The air conditioning system can be switchedoff, but for optimal air quality in the passengercompartment and to prevent the windows fromfogging, the air conditioning should be left on– even in cool weather.

NOTE

In warm weather, a small amount of watermay accumulate under the car when it hasbeen parked. This water is condensationfrom the A/C system and is normal.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base ofthe windshield free of snow.

Fog on the inside of the windows

The defroster function should be used toremove fog or mist from the inside of the win-dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-mercially available window washing spray willalso help prevent fogging or misting

Climate control maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required tomaintain and carry out repairs on the climatesystem. Work of this type should only be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The airconditioning system in your car contains aCFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substancewill not deplete the ozone layer. The systemcontains 1.2 lbs (530 g) R134a (HFC 134a), anduses PAG oil.

Passenger compartment filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one atthe recommended intervals. Please refer toyour Warranty and Service Records Informa-tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for these intervals.The filter should be replaced more often whendriving under dirty and dusty conditions. Thefilter cannot be cleaned and therefore shouldalways be replaced with a new one.

NOTE

There are different types of cabin air filters.Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Display

The display above the climate control panelshows the climate settings that have beenmade.

Personal settings

There are two functions in the climate systemthat can be set to your preferences:

• Blower speed to Auto mode (models withECC only).

• Timer controlled recirculation of the air inthe passenger compartment.

03 Climate

General information

03


For information about how to make these set-tings, see the Personal settings section onpage 82.

Models equipped with ECC*

Sensors

• The sunlight sensor is on the upper side ofthe dashboard

• The passenger compartment temperaturesensor is located behind the climate sys-tem control panel.

• The ambient temperature sensor is in thedriver's side door mirror.

• The humidity sensor is in the rearview mir-ror.

These sensors should never be obstructed.

NOTE

The sunlight sensor monitors the side of thevehicle from which the sun shines into thepassenger compartment. This means thatthe temperature may differ slightly betweenthe left and right air vents, even if the climatesystem temperature is set to be the samefor both sides of the passenger compart-ment.

Side windows and optional moonroof

The electronic climate control system will func-tion best if the windows and moonroof are

closed. If you drive with the windows or moon-roof open, it may be preferable to manuallyadjust the temperature and blower control (theLED in the AUTO switch should be off).

Acceleration

The air conditioning system is temporarilyswitched off during full throttle acceleration.

03 Climate

Air vents

03

92

Air vents in the dashboard

G019942

Open

Closed

Horizontal air flow

Vertical air flow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

03 Climate

Manual climate control

03

��

93

G019515

Climate system control panel

Blower speed

Recirculation

Defroster

Airflow controls

A/C – ON/OFF

Heated driver's seat

Heated front passenger's seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature selector

Manual climate system functions

1. Blower

The blower speed can beincreased or decreased byturning the knob. If the knob isturned counterclockwise andthe indicator light in the dis-play goes out, the blower andthe air conditioning are

switched off. The display shows the blowersymbol and OFF.

2. Recirculation

This function can be used toshut out exhaust fumes,smoke, etc from the passen-ger compartment. The air inthe passenger compartmentis then recirculated, i.e. no airfrom outside the car is taken

into the car when this function is activated.Recirculation (together with the air condition-ing system) cools the passenger compartmentmore quickly in very warm weather. If the air inthe car recirculates for too long, there is a riskof condensation forming on the insides of thewindows, especially in winter.

03 Climate


03


Timer

The timer function minimizes the risk of mist-ing, or stale air when the recirculation functionis selected, see page 82 for information on set-ting the recirculation timer. Recirculation isalways disengaged when you selectDefroster (3).

3. Defroster

Directs airflow to the wind-shield and side windows andincreases blower speed.

When the defroster is activated:

• Air flows to the windows at high blowerspeed.

• The LED in the defroster button lights upwhen this function is activated. The air con-ditioning system is controlled to providemaximum air dehumidification.

• The air conditioning is automaticallyswitched on (can be switched off by press-ing button 5).

4. Airflow controls

Press one of the three buttonsin the illustration to activatethe selected airflow. A symbolin the display above the cli-mate control panel and a litLED in the selected buttonindicate that the manual func-

tion has been selected. With manually selectedairflow both warm and cool air can be selected.The desired temperature is selected using con-trol 9.

5. A/C – On or Off

ON: The air conditioning sys-tem is engaged when the ON

light is lit.

OFF: The system is disen-gaged when the OFF lightsup.

If Defroster (3) is activated the air conditioningis always engaged.

6/7. Heated front seats*

Maximum heating:

� Press the button once – both LEDs light up.

Reduced heating:

� Press the button a second time – one LEDlights up.

Seat heating off:

� Press the button a third time – no LEDs arelit.

8. Heated rear window and door mirrors

Press to defrost the rear win-dow and door mirrors.

The rear window and doormirrors are defrosted simulta-neously if the switch ispressed once. The defrost

function is active if the LED in the switch is illu-minated.

• The function can be switched off manuallyby pressing the button,

• The defrost function switches off automat-ically after 12–20 minutes, depending onthe outside temperature.

NOTE

On certain markets, the defrost functionmay remain on longer than 20 minutes incold weather to help keep the rear windowfree from ice or condensation.

03 Climate


03

95

9. Temperature selector

The knob with the thermome-ter symbol is used to selectcooling or heating for both thedriver's and passenger'ssides of the car.

03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)*

03


G019518

Auto – On/Off

Blower speed

Recirculation

Defroster

Airflow controls

A/C – ON/OFF

Heated driver's seat

Heated front passenger's seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature selector

ECC functions

1. Auto – On/Off

The AUTO function automat-ically regulates climate con-trol to maintain the desiredtemperature. The automaticfunction controls heating, airconditioning, blower speed,recirculation, and air distribu-

tion.

If you select one or more manual functions, theremaining functions continue to be controlledautomatically. All manual settings are switchedoff when AUTO is switched on. AUTO

CLIMATE is shown in the display.

2. Blower speed

The blower speed can beincreased or decreased byturning the knob. The blowerspeed is regulated automati-cally if AUTO is selected. Thepreviously set blower speed isdisconnected.

NOTE

If the knob is turned counterclockwise andthe blower indication in the display goesout, the blower and the air conditioning areswitched off. The display shows the blowersymbol and OFF.

03 Climate


03

��


3. Recirculation

This function can be used toshut out exhaust fumes,smoke, etc from the passen-ger compartment. The air inthe passenger compartmentis then recirculated, i.e. no airfrom outside the car is taken

into the car when this function is activated.

If the air in the car recirculates for too long,there is a risk of condensation forming on theinsides of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer

The timer function minimizes the risk of foggingor stale air when the recirculation function isselected, see page 82 for information on set-ting the recirculation timer.

NOTE

Recirculation is always disengaged if thedefroster button is engaged to clear ice orcondensation from the side windows.

4. Defroster

Directs airflow to the wind-shield and side windows andincreases blower speed.When the defroster is acti-vated:

• Air flows to the windows at high blowerspeed.

• The LED in the defroster button lights upwhen this function is activated. The air con-ditioning system is controlled to providemaximum air dehumidification.

• The air conditioning is automaticallyswitched on (can be switched off by press-ing button 6).

The air is not recirculated.

5. Airflow controls

Press one of the three buttonsin the illustration to activatethe selected airflow. A symbolin the display above the cli-mate control panel and a litLED in the selected buttonindicate that the manual func-

tion has been selected. With manually selectedairflow both warm and cool air can be selected.See also the table on page 97.

6. Air conditioning On/Off

ON: The air conditioning sys-tem is engaged when the ON

light is lit and is controlledautomatically by the systemto maintain the selected tem-perature.

OFF: The system is disengaged when theOFF lights up

When OFF is selected and the OFF LED is lit,the air conditioning system is deactivated.Other functions are still controlled automati-cally.

When Defroster (4) is selected, the air condi-tioning system is activated for maximum dehu-midifying.

7 and 8. Heated front seats*

Maximum heating:

� Press the button once – both LEDs light up.

Reduced heating:

03 Climate


03


� Press the button a second time – one LEDlights up.

Seat heating off:

� Press the button a third time – no LEDs arelit.

9. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

� Press to defrost the rear window and doormirrors.

The rear window and door mirrors are defros-ted simultaneously if the switch is pressedonce. The defrost function is active if the LEDin the switch is illuminated.

• The function can be switched off manuallyby pressing the button.

• The defrost function switches off automat-ically after 12–20 minutes, depending onthe outside temperature.

NOTE

• On certain markets, the defrost functionmay remain on longer than 20 minutesin cold weather to help keep the rearwindow free from ice or condensation.

10. Temperature selector

The temperatures on the driv-er's and passenger's sidescan be set separately usingthe knob (with the thermome-ter in it). The temperature canbe set for both sides of the carwhen the ignition is switched

on (both LEDs will be on), which means that atemperature setting will apply to both sides ofthe car.

To set the temperature on one side of the car:

1. Press the knob once. The LED for one sideof the car will light up. Turn the knob toadjust the temperature.

2. Press the knob a second time to set thetemperature on the opposite side of thecar.

3. Press the knob a third time to set the tem-perature on both sides of the car at thesame time.

NOTE

Selecting a temperature that is higher orlower than necessary will not heat or coolthe passenger compartment faster.

03 Climate

Air distribution

03

99

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:

Defroster.

Air is not recirculated inthis mode.

Air conditioning is alwaysengaged.

There is also a certainamount of airflow to thepanel air vents.

Defrost/de-fog the wind-shield and front side win-dows.

Air to the floor and win-dows.

There is also a certainamount of airflow to thedashboard air vents.

For comfortable condi-tions and good defrostingin cold weather.

Medium to high blowerspeed.

Air to windshield and frontside windows.

There is also a certainamount of airflow to thedashboard air vents.

Prevents fogging in coldor humid weather (blowerspeed should be moder-ate to high).

Air to the floor and fromthe dashboard air vents.

For sunny weather withcool ambient tempera-tures.

Air to the windows andfrom the dashboard airvents.

For good comfort inwarm, dry weather.

Air to the floor.

There is a certain amountof airflow to the dash-board and window airvents.

To warm the feet.

Airflow directed to thehead and chest from thedashboard air vents.

To ensure efficient coolingin a warm weather.

Airflow to the windows,dashboard air vents, andfloor.

For cooler air toward thefeet, or for warmer airtoward the head andchest.

G020908

100

Front seats............................................................................................ 102Interior lighting...................................................................................... 110Storage compartments......................................................................... 111Rear seat............................................................................................... 115Cargo area............................................................................................ 117

04INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

04

102

Manual seat adjustment

The driver's and passenger's seats can beadjusted in a number of ways to provide acomfortable driving and sitting position.

Forward-rearward: Pull the lever up andslide the seat to the position of your choice.

Use this control to raise or lower the frontedge of the seat cushion.

Use this control to raise or lower the rearedge of the seat cushion.

Turn this knob (optional on some passeng-er's seats) to adjust the firmness of thelumbar support1.

Turn this knob to adjust the backrest tilt.

Control panel for the optional power seats.

NOTE

Both front seats are equipped with headrestraints that can be adjusted vertically tosuit the height of the passenger. The upperedge of the head restraint should be at leaston a level with the upper-most point of theseat occupant's ear (see the section"Adjusting the front seat head restraints" onpage 108).

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while driving.

• Adjust the driver’s seat and seat belt(see page 18) before driving. The seatshould be adjusted so that the brakepedal can be depressed fully.

• Position the seat as far rearward ascomfort and control allow.

Accessing the rear seat

Seat access buttons (power seat shown)

Seat adjustment handle

Seat adjustment button

1 Also applies to the optional power seat.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

��

103

Manual seat

Moving the seat forward:

Remove the seat belt from its guide (seepage 19).

Pull up the handle.

Hold the handle up and move it forwardslightly until the backrest begins to move.

Press the handle down.

Fold the backrest forward until it locks inposition.

Move the seat forward.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

104

Moving the seat rearward:

With the backrest folded forward in the

locked position, slide the seat rearwarduntil it stops/locks in its original position.

Pull up the handle.

Hold the handle up and move it rearwardslightly until the backrest begins to move.


Fold up the backrest to the upright posi-tion.> The seat will return to the position it was

in before it was moved.

6. Return the seat belt to its guide.

Seat position

If the seat does not return to its original posi-tion, reset the seat memory function as follows:

1. Sit in the seat.

2. Lift the handle (1) (see page 102) and movethe seat as far rearward as possible.

3. While holding the handle up, move the seatforward to the desired position.

Power seat

Moving the seat forward:

Remove the seat belt from its guide (seepage 19).

04 Interior

Front seats

04

��

105

Pull up the handle.

Hold the handle up and move it forwardslightly until the backrest begins to move.


Fold the backrest forward until it locks inposition.

6. Hold down the button while the seat movesforward. If the seat is in a high position, itwill be lowered automatically so that thehead restraint does not come in contactwith the sun visor.

Moving the seat rearward:

1. With the backrest folded forward in the

locked position, press and hold down thebutton until the seat has returned to itsoriginal position.

Pull up the handle.

Hold the handle up and move it rearwardslightly until the backrest begins to move.

04 Interior

Front seats

04



Fold up the backrest to the upright posi-tion.> The seat will return to its original posi-

tion.

6. Return the seat belt to its guide.

The front passenger's seat belt should bein its guide while the vehicle is being driven,even if the seat is not occupied.

WARNING

After the seat has been returned to its orig-inal position, be sure that the backrest issecurely locked in the upright position.

Power seats*

The power driver's seat can be adjusted:

• If the ignition key is in position I or II.

• During a 10 minute period after the doorshave been unlocked if the door remainsopen.

• If the door is closed and the ignition key isnot yet in the ignition, or if the key is inposition 0, the seat can be adjusted or dur-ing a period of 40 seconds. The powerpassenger's seat can only be adjusted ifthe ignition key is in position I or II, or if theengine is running.

Adjusting the seat

G020199

Seat adjustment controls

Seat adjustment controls 1, 2, 3, and 4 on theside of the seat can be used to move the seatto the position of your choice.

Move this section of the control up or downto raise/lower the front section of the seatcushion.

Move the control forward/rearward tomove the seat forward or rearward.

Move this section of the control up or downto raise/lower the rear section of the seatcushion.

Backrest tilt.

NOTE

Both front seats are equipped with headrestraints that can be adjusted vertically tosuit the height of the passenger. The upperedge of the head restraint should be at leaston a level with the upper-most point of theseat occupant's ear (see the section"Adjusting the front seat head restraints" onpage 108).

NOTE

The power seats have an overload protectorthat activates if a seat is blocked by anyobject. If this occurs, switch off the ignition(key in position 0) and wait for approxi-mately 20 seconds before operating theseat again.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

��


Emergency stop

If the seat inadvertently begins to move, pressany of the buttons to stop the seat.

Programming the seat memory, driver's

seat only*

G020200

Power seat memory buttons

Three different seating positions can be storedin the seat's memory. The memory buttons arelocated on the outboard side of the driver'sseat (see the illustration above). The followingexample explains how memory button 1 can beprogrammed. Buttons 2 and 3 can be pro-grammed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat position in memorybutton 1:

1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.

2. Press and hold down the "M" (Memory)button.

3. With the "M" button depressed, pressmemory button 1 to store the seat's currentposition.

To move the seat to the position that it was inwhen memory button 1 was programmed,press and hold down button 1 until the seatstops moving.

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop auto-matically if the button is released before theseat has reached the preset position.

Central locking system remote key and

driver's seat memory

The remote key transmitter can also be equip-ped with an optional function that controls theelectrically operated driver's seat in the follow-ing way:

1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.

2. When you leave the car, lock it using theremote key.

3. The next time the driver's door is unlockedwith the same remote key and that door isopened within 2 minutes, the driver's seatand side door mirrors will automaticallymove to the position that they were in when

the doors were most recently locked withthe same remote key.

NOTE

The memory function in the remote keyoperates independently the memory func-tion in the seat.

WARNING

• Because the driver's seat can beadjusted with the ignition off, childrenshould never be left unattended in thecar.

• Movement of the seat can be STOPPEDat any time by pressing any button onthe power seat control panel.

• Do not adjust the seat while driving. Theseat should be adjusted so that thebrake pedal can be depressed fully. Inaddition, position the seat as far rear-ward as comfort and control allow.

• The seat rails on the floor must not beobstructed in any way when the seat isin motion.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

108

Adjusting the front seat head restraints

The front seat head restraints are designed sothat they can be adjusted to two differentheight positions.

NOTE

• When the vehicle leaves the factory, thefront seat head restraints will be in thelower position.

• It is advisable to have the headrestraints in the lower position if youwish to fold down the seat's backrest.

The head restraints should be put in the upperor lower position according to the height of theoccupant of the seat.

The upper edge of the head restraint should beat least on a level with the upper-most point ofthe seat occupant's ear (see illustration).

To raise or lower a head restraint:

Raising or lowering a head restraint

1. Release the head restraint by pressing thebutton underneath its left side, at the baseof the support (see the illustration).

2. Move the head restraint until it clicks(locks) into the upper or lower position.

WARNING

After adjusting the head restraint, be surethat it is securely locked in the new positionby pressing and/or pulling it.

Removing a head restraint

The front seat head restraints can be removed,for example, when cleaning the upholstery or ifthe front passenger's seat backrest is foldeddown to accommodate a long load. To do so:

1. Release the head restraint by pressing therelease button underneath its left side, atthe base of the support.

2. While holding in the release button, pressthe locking button at the base of the headrestraint's right support with a screwdriver, etc., and lift the head restraint untilit can be removed completely.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

109

WARNING

• If a front seat head restraint has beenremoved, it must be put properly backin place and it must lock (click) into oneof the available adjustment positionsbefore the seat is occupied.

• The front seat head restraints must bein position and properly adjusted to theheight of the person sitting in the seatwhen the vehicle is driven and when thefront passenger's seat is occupied.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

110

Interior lighting

G020201

Front courtesy lights and reading lights

Front driver's side reading light, on/off

Courtesy lighting

Front passenger's side reading light, on/off

The front seat reading lights can be switchedon and off by pressing buttons (1) or (3) whenthe ignition key is position I or II, or when theengine is running.

The courtesy lighting (2) can be set to threepositions:

� Press the left side of the button: the interiorcourtesy lighting turns on.

� Neutral position: the interior courtesy light-ing comes on when a door is opened, andis switched off 10 seconds after the door isclosed.

� Press the right side of the button: the inte-rior courtesy lighting stays off.

Courtesy lighting – automatic function

The interior lighting has a built-in automaticfunction that switches on the courtesy lightingfor 30 seconds when:

• the car is unlocked from the outside usingthe key blade or remote key

• the engine is switched off and the ignitionkey is turned to the 0 position.

The courtesy lighting lights up or remains onfor 5 minutes when:

• one of the doors is opened and left open.

• the courtesy lighting has not beenswitched off (the right side of button 2depressed).

The automatic lighting goes out when:

• the engine is started

• the car is locked from the outside using thekey blade or remote key.

If the courtesy lighting is not switched off man-ually, it will be turned off automatically

5 minutes after the engine has been switchedoff.

Footwell lighting

The footwell (and courtesy lighting) comes onor goes off when one of the side doors isopened or closed.

Vanity mirror

G020210

Raise the cover to switch on the light.

04 Interior

Storage compartments

04

��

111

04 Interior


04

112

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket (on the front side of thefront seat cushion, depending on choice ofupholstery)

Jacket hanger (intended for light garmentsonly)

Glove compartment

Storage compartment for e.g., CDs andcup holders

Compartment in rear side panels, withspace for up to three beverage cans

Compartment on rear side of front seatbackrests

WARNING

• Anchor any heavy objects to preventthem from moving during sudden stops.

• Packages on the rear parcel shelf canobscure vision and may become dan-gerous projectiles in the event of a sud-den stop or an accident.

Glove compartment

G024208

The owners manual and maps can be storedhere. There are also holders for coins, pens andfuel cards. The glove compartment can only belocked and unlocked using the detachable keyblade from the central locking system's remotekey. See page 124 for information on removingthe key blade from the remote key, and page131 for information about locking the glovecompartment.

Jacket hanger

The jacket hanger is located on the inboardside of the front passenger's seat headrestraint. It is only intended for hanging lightgarments.

04 Interior


04

��

113

Storage under the front, center armrest

G018371

There are two storage compartments under thefront, center armrest.

• Press the smaller button on the front edgeof the armrest and lift the armrest cover toaccess a shallow storage compartment.

• Press the larger button and lift the entirearmrest to access a deeper compartment.

CD storage

G026704

The deep storage compartment has room for10 CD jewel cases. These cases must beinserted with their spines upward in order toallow space for 10 cases in the storage com-partment

Cup holders in the center console

G018372

Two cup holders are located under the slidingcover in the center console.

The cup holders can be lifted out if necessary.To do so, grasp the indentation on the rearedge of the cup holder and lift.

To put the cup holder back in place:

1. Slide the two locating tabs in the front sideof the cup holder into the two correspond-ing recesses in the center console storagespace.

2. Press down the rear edge of the cupholder.

To close the sliding cover, grasp the undersideof the front edge and pull.

04 Interior


04

114

Storage compartment behind the gearlever

G019623

If the buttons for optional equipment are notinstalled, the recess behind the gear lever canbe used as a storage compartment for coins,etc.

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

��

115

Folding down the rear seat backrests

G009109

Both sections of the rear seat backrest can befolded down, together or separately, to enableyou to transport long objects.

To fold down one or both sections:

1. Pull the catch on the upper outboard edgeof the backrest upward and forward torelease the backrest lock. A red lock indi-cator (A) is visible when the backrest is notlocked in the upright position.

2. Fold the backrest down.

G007608

WARNING

• The red lock indicator is VISIBLE whenthe backrest is NOT locked in positionand hidden when the backrest is cor-rectly locked in place. When the back-rest is in the upright position, it mustalways be correctly locked in place.

• When the rear seat is folded down, donot place heavy objects against thebacks of the front seats. This places asevere strain on the folded down back-rest of the rear seat. Be sure to securecargo.

• Cargo must not be stacked higher thanthe top of seat backs. This will reducethe possibility of luggage, etc. becom-ing projectiles during sudden maneu-vers, rapid braking or an accident.

04 Interior

Rear seat

04


Rear seat armrest*

G009152

The center armrest can be folded down forcomfort or to make room for long objects. Thearmrest folds down automatically when one ofthe backrests is folded down.

WARNING

Long loads should be securely anchored.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

��


Load anchoring eyelets

G007602

The eyelets in the cargo area can be used tofasten accessory load nets and lashing straps,load nets, and other load anchors.

Hard cargo area cover*

G009475

Installing the cargo area cover

1. Before lifting cover into the vehicle, retractall four lock pins by pulling back the lockbuttons as far as possible. The pins willremain retracted.

2. Lift the cover into the vehicle at an angle,turn it back and raise the front edgeslightly.

3. Place the front section of the cover on thetwo support pins behind the locking points(A) on both sides of the vehicle.

G007611

4. Place one of the rear locks at (B) and slidethe lock pin into position by moving thelock button forward.

5. Put the other rear lock into position in thesame way and slide the lock pin into posi-tion by moving the lock button forward.

6. Slide the front lock buttons forward, one ata time, so that the lock pins move intoposition (A).

NOTE

The rear section of the cover can be foldedup when loading items into the cargo area.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04


WARNING

The cargo area cover does not have a loadanchoring function. No item should be placeon top of the cargo area cover. These itemscould move forward and cause injury duringbraking.

Removing the cover

1. Retract the front lock pins at (A) by pullingback the lock buttons on both sides as faras possible.

2. Retract the rear lock pins at (B) by pullingback the lock buttons on both sides as faras possible.

3. Lift up and turn the cover before lifting it outof the vehicle.

Soft cargo area cover*

G007614

The cargo area cover is pulled over the cargoarea and fastened to the eyelets with the hookson the corners of the cover.

Installing the cover

1. Attach the front lower hooks on the coverto the lower eyelets (A) on opposite sidesof the vehicle.

2. Insert the front upper attachments (B) bypressing together the spring-loaded railsand pressing them into place on oppositesides of the vehicle.

3. Insert the upper rear rails (C) in the sameway.

4. Attach the rear lower hooks on the cover tothe lower eyelets (D) on opposite sides ofthe vehicle.

Hanging the cover when it is not in use

1. Remove the rear hooks (D) from the eye-lets.

2. Press together the rear rails (C) and removethem from their attachments. Place themat the front of the cargo area floor.

3. Attach the hooks in the rail next to theattachments (B).

The cargo area cover is now hanging near therear seat backrests until it is needed again.

Removing the cargo area cover

1. Remove the hooks and remove the railsone at a time by pressing them togetherand removing them from their attach-ments.

2. When all attachments have been removed,the cover can be rolled up and placed onthe rear part of the cargo area floor to makeroom for cargo.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04


WARNING

The cargo area cover does not have a loadanchoring function. No item should be placeon top of the cargo area cover. These itemscould move forward and cause injury duringbraking.

Cargo area net*

G007603

The cargo area net can be placed behind thefront seat backrests.This net is only intendedto be used when the rear seat backrests arefolded down.

Installing the net

1. Fold down the rear seat backrests (seepage 115).

2. Attach the cargo net to the upper mountingbrackets near the ceiling.

3. Attach the cargo net’s hooks in the eyeletsnear the seat belts floor anchorages onopposite sides of the vehicle.

4. Pull the cargo net’s bands taut if neces-sary.

WARNING

• Be sure that the net is securely attachedin the mounting brackets and eyelets.

• Cargo should be properly secured evenwhen the net is in use.

Removing the cargo net

1. Release the pressure on the bands.

2. Remove the hooks from the eyelets nearthe floor.

3. Remove the net from the ceiling mountingbrackets.

4. Fold the net and keep it in its storage bag.

Folding up the cargo area floor hatch

G014316

Without the cargo area cover

Fold up the hatch and attach it to the latcheson both sides of the cargo area.

With the hard cover in place

1. Fold up the hatch on the cargo area cover.

2. Fold up the floor hatch and fasten it to thehook on the underside of the cargo areacover.


Remote key and key blade................................................................... 122Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 127Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 131Alarm*.................................................................................................... 132

05LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

05

122

Remote keys

Two remote keys that also function as ignitionkeys are provided with your car. The remotekeys contain detachable metal key blades formanually locking or unlocking the driver's doorand the glove compartment.

USA – FCC ID: LTQVO315TX

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the following con-ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada – IC: 3659AVO315TX

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Loss of a remote key

If either of the remote keys is lost, the othermust be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lostremote key must be erased from the system.

Each key blade has a unique code, which isused if new key blades are required. A maxi-mum of six remote keys/key blades can beprogrammed and used for one car.

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

Each of the keys supplied with your car con-tains a coded transponder. The code in the keyis transmitted to an antenna in the ignitionswitch where it is compared to the code storedin the start inhibitor module. The car will startonly with a properly coded key. If you misplacea key, take the other keys to an authorizedVolvo retailer for reprogramming as an antitheftmeasure.

CAUTION

Never use force on the narrow section of theremote key – this is where the transponderis located. The car cannot be started if thetransponder is damaged.

USA – FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the following con-dition: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada – IC: 3659A-WFS125VO

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote key functions

G019402

Lock – Press the Lock button on theremote once to lock all doors and the lift-gate. The turn signals will flash once toconfirm locking.

NOTE

The car can also be locked if a door is open(does not apply to vehicles with the optionalkeyless drive).

05 Locks and alarm


05

��

123

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on theremote once to unlock the driver's door.After a short pause, press the Unlock but-ton a second time within 10 seconds tounlock the other doors and the liftgate. Along press (at least several seconds) opensall side windows.

NOTE

• The turn signals flash to confirm that thevehicle has been correctly locked/unlocked with the remote key or theoptional keyless drive. When locking thevehicle, the turn signals will flash a con-firmation only if all the doors aresecurely closed and locked. Flashingconfirmation for locking and unlockingmay be customized in the vehicle's Per-sonal settings menu, see page 82 formore information.

• The two-step unlocking function can bechanged so that one press of theUnlock button unlocks all of the doorsand the liftgate. See Personal settingspage 82 for more information.

• Automatic relocking: If the doors areunlocked, the locks will automatically reen-gage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after

2 minutes unless a door or the liftgate hasbeen opened.

• Automatic locking: When the car starts tomove, the doors and liftgate can be lockedautomatically. This feature can be turnedon or off, see Personal settings on page82 for more information.

• Airbag deployment will automaticallyattempt to unlock the doors.

Approach lighting – As you approach thecar: Press the button on the remote key toilluminate the area around the car in darkconditions. Pressing the button once lightsup the interior lighting, parking lights, andlicense plate lighting. These lights willswitch off automatically after 30, 60 or90 seconds. See the Personal settings page 82 for information about adjusting thetime setting.

Unlock liftgate – Press the button once todisarm the alarm system and unlock onlythe liftgate. After closing, the liftgate willnot automatically relock. Press Lock torelock it and rearm the alarm.

NOTE

This function will not open the liftgate.

Panic alarm – This button can be used toattract attention during emergency situa-tions. To activate the panic alarm, pressand hold the red button for at least 3 sec-onds or press it twice within 3 seconds.The turn signals and horn will be activated.The panic alarm will stop automaticallyafter 30 seconds. To deactivate, waitapproximately 5 seconds and press the redbutton again.

NOTE

This button will NOT unlock the car.

Weak battery in the remote key

G019406

05 Locks and alarm


05

124

When the battery begins to lose its charge, theInformation symbol in the instrument panel(see page 55) lights up and KEY BATTERY

LOW VOLTAGE is shown in the informationdisplay.

Replacing the battery in the remote key

If the range of the transmitter is noticeablyreduced, this indicates that the battery (typeCR 2450, 3V) is weak and should be replaced.To replace the battery:

1. Place the remote key with the keypaddownward. Pry open the cover with a smallslotted screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover.

CAUTION

When replacing the battery, avoid touchingthe electrical circuitry in the other half of theremote key.

3. Note how the + and – sides of the batteryare positioned on the inside of the cover(see the underside of the cover).

4. Pry out and replace the battery. Avoidtouching the battery and its contact surfa-ces with your fingers.

5. Press the cover back into place.

The old battery should be disposed of properlyat a recycling center or by a trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician.

Key blade

G019403

Removing the key blade

The key blade can be removed from the remotekey. When removed, it can be used as follows:

• To lock/unlock the driver’s door

• To lock/unlock the glove compartment,see page 131.

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

While holding the catch, pull the key bladeout of the remote key.

Reinserting the key blade in the remote

key

1. Hold the remote key with the pointed enddown.

2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

3. Gently press the key blade in the grooveuntil it clicks into place.

Unlocking the doors with the detached

key blade

1. Insert the key blade as far as possible in thedriver's door lock.

2. Turn the key blade clockwise approxi-mately one-quarter turn to unlock the driv-er's door only.

NOTE

After unlocking the driver's door with thekey blade, opening the door will trigger thealarm.

To disable the alarm

Press the Unlock button on the remote key, orinsert the key in the ignition switch.

05 Locks and alarm


05

��

125

Locking the doors with the detached key

blade

1. Lock the other door(s) by pressing the lockbutton on each door. Please note that thisdoes not arm the alarm or lock the liftgate.

2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn coun-ter-clockwise to lock the driver's door.

Locking points

By utilizing the remote key with the key bladeremoved, you can block access to the glovecompartment for e.g. valet parking or when thecar is brought to the retailer for service.

05 Locks and alarm


05

126

G019405

Locking/unlocking points for the remotekey with the key blade

Locking/unlocking points for the remotekey without the key blade

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

��


Keyless locking and unlocking

G007577

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft(1.5 meters)

This system makes it possible to unlock andlock the vehicle without having to use theremote key. It is only necessary to have a key-less drive remote key in your possession tooperate the central locking system.

NOTE

The buttons on the keyless drive remote keycan also be used to lock and unlock thevehicle, see page 122 for more information.

Both of the remote keys provided with the vehi-cle have the keyless function, and additionalremotes can be ordered. The system canaccommodate up to six keyless drive remotekeys.

NOTE

The number of doors that are unlocked atthe same time can be set in the Personalsettings menu, see page 82 for additionalinformation.

Unlocking the vehicle

• A keyless drive remote key must be on thesame side of the vehicle as the door to beopened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters)of the lock or the liftgate opening control(see the shaded areas in the illustration).

• Pull a door handle to unlock and open thedoor or press the liftgate opening controlon the liftgate.

• See page 148 for information on starting avehicle equipped with keyless drive.

Locking the vehicle

G020033

Keyless drive lock button

The doors and the liftgate can be locked bypressing the lock button in any of the outsidedoor handles.

NOTE

• If one or more doors and/or the liftgateis not fully closed when the lock buttonis pressed, the door(s) or liftgate will notbe locked.

• On keyless drive vehicles with an auto-matic transmission, the gear selectormust be in the Park (P) position and theignition must be switched off before thedoors/liftgate can be locked.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05


Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the

key blade

G020225

Keyless drive keyhole cover

The driver's door on vehicles equipped withkeyless drive can be locked or unlocked withthe remote key's detachable key blade if nec-essary, see page 123 for information on remov-ing the key blade from the remote key. Toaccess the keyhole in the driver's door:

• Pry off the keyhole cover by inserting thekey blade or a small screwdriver in the holeon the underside of the cover (indicated bythe arrow in the inset illustration).

• Insert the key blade as far as possible in thedriver's door lock. Turn the key bladeclockwise approximately one-quarter turn

to unlock the driver's door only. This willtrigger the alarm.

• To disable the alarm: Press the Unlockbutton on the keyless drive remote key. Ifthe batteries in the remote are weak,remove the keyless drive start control fromthe ignition switch by pressing the catch(see the illustration on page 148) and pull-ing the control out of the ignition switch.Insert the ignition key section of a keylessdrive remote key in the ignition switch.

Keyless drive remote key and driver's

seat memory

This function is only available on vehiclesequipped with the optional power driver's seat.

• When you leave the car with a keyless driveremote key in your possession and lockany door, the position of the driver's seatwill be stored in the seat's memory.

• The next time a door is opened by a personwith the same remote key in his/her pos-session, the driver's seat will automaticallymove to the position that it was in when thedoor was most recently locked.

NOTE

If several people carrying keyless driveremote keys approach the vehicle at thesame time, the driver's seat will assume theposition it was in for the person who opensa door first.

Keyless drive information messages

If anyone leaves the vehicle with the only key-less drive remote key in his or her possessionwhile the ignition is switched on, a message willbe shown in the information display and anaudible signal will sound.

NOTE

This message will only be displayed if thestart control is in position I or II.

The message will be erased from the displayand the audible signal will stop when theremote key has been returned to the vehicleand one of the following has occurred:

• A door has been opened and closed

• The start control has been turned to posi-tion 0

• The READ button (see page 60 for thelocation of this button) has been pressed.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

��


CAUTION

• Keyless drive remote keys should neverbe left in the vehicle. In the event of abreak-in, a remote found in the vehiclecould make it possible to start theengine.

• Electromagnetic fields or metalobstructions can interfere with the key-less drive system. Avoid placing theremote key near cellular phones, metal-lic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase.

Canada – IC:267T- 5WK48952,

267T- 5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891

NOTE

This device complies with RSS -210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,

KR55WK48964

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

Siemens VDO

5WK48891

Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

For Automobile Use

Location of the keyless drive antennas

The keyless drive system has a number ofantennas located at various points in the vehi-cle.

G020075

On the inside center of the rear bumper

Under the floor of the cargo area, near therear seat

Left door handle

Under the rear section of the center con-sole

Right door handle

Under the front section of the center con-sole

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05


WARNING

People with implanted pacemakers shouldnot allow the pacemaker to come closerthan 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keylessdrive system's antennas. This is to help pre-vent interference between the pacemakerand the keylesss drive system.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

131

Locking/unlocking the vehicle from theinside

G007451

The switches near the door opening handles oneither door can be used to lock or unlock bothdoors and the liftgate, open the windows in thedoors1, and to set the alarm.

� Unlocking: Press the upper section of theswitch. A long press (for several seconds)also opens the windows in the doors.

� Locking: Press the lower section of thelock button.

NOTE

• The ignition key must be in position I orhigher (see page 145) before the win-dows in the doors can be opened usingthe switches in the front doors.

• The doors cannot be opened by pullingup the lock buttons.

• If both doors are closed when a lockbutton is pressed, the alarm will not bearmed.

• Each door can also be locked manuallyusing the lock button on that particulardoor. This applies only if the car has notbeen locked from the outside.

• The doors can also be unlocked (andthe door opened) by pulling the handlein the door twice.

Locking the glove compartment

G020034

The glove compartment can only be lockedand unlocked using the detachable key bladeon the remote key, see page 123 for informa-tion on removing the key blade from the remotekey.

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-ment lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

Unlock the glove compartment in the reverseorder.

1 This function must be set to On in the Personal settings menu (see page 83)

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05


The alarm system

The alarm is automatically armed whenever thecar is locked with the remote key, or if a frontlock button is depressed.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitorsa number of points on the car. The followingconditions will trigger the alarm:

• The hood is forced open.

• The liftgate is forced open.

• A door is forced open.

• The ignition switch is tampered with

• An attempt is made to start the car with anon-approved key (a key not coded to thecar's ignition).

• If there is movement in the passenger com-partment (if the car is equipped with theoptional movement sensor).

• The car is lifted or towed (if the car is equip-ped with the optional inclination sensor)

• The battery is disconnected (while thealarm is armed).

• The siren is disconnected when the alarmis disarmed.

• The liftgate window is broken.

The alarm indicator light

G020227

Alarm indicator light

The status of the alarm system is indicated bythe indicator light on at the top of the dash-board (see the illustration):

• Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed

• The indicator light flashes every two sec-onds – the alarm is armed

• The indicator light flashes rapidly beforethe ignition is switched on – the alarm hasbeen triggered. The message ALARM

TRIGGERED, CHECK CAR will also bedisplayed.

• Fault in the alarm system: If a fault hasbeen detected in the alarm system, a mes-sage will be shown in the information dis-play. Contact your Volvo retailer to havethe alarm system inspected and repaired ifnecessary.

Arming the alarm

� Press the LOCK button on the remote key,or press the central lock button on one ofthe front doors with the door open. Onelong flash of the turn signals will confirmthat the alarm is armed.

Disarming the alarm

� Press the UNLOCK button on the remotekey or insert the key in the ignition1 to dis-arm the alarm. Two short flashes from thecar's direction indicators confirm that thealarm has been deactivated and that alldoors are unlocked.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, press in the start control in the ignition switch.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

��


Turning off (stopping) the alarm

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped bypressing the UNLOCK button on the remotekey or by inserting the key in the ignition switch.The driver's door must first be unlocked withthe key blade.

NOTE

On vehicles equipped with the optional key-less drive, the start control must beremoved from the ignition switch before thekey can be inserted, see page 148 forinstructions.

Audible/visual alarm signal

An audible alarm signal is given by a batterypowered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for30 seconds.

NOTE

The visual alarm signal is given by flashingall turn signals and turning on the interiorlighting for approximately 5 minutes.

Temporarily turning off the accessoryalarm sensor(s)

G02

6313

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Menu navigation controls

In certain situations it may be desirable to turnoff the accessory inclination and movementalarm sensors if, for example, you drive yourvehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of theboat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left inthe vehicle with the doors locked.

To do so:

1. Press MENU to enter the menu system andscroll to Car settings (for a more detaileddescription of the menus, see page 82.

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once and the messageReduced guard – See manual willappear in the information display. Thealarm sensors will be turned off when thevehicle is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit. Each time the ignitionkey is turned to position 0, the messagePress ENTER to reduce guard until

engine is started. Press EXIT to

cancel will be displayed. Select one of thealternatives:

• If the alarm sensors are to be deactivated,press ENTER and then lock the vehicle.

The next time the ignition key is turned to posi-tion II, the sensors will be reactivated and Full

guard will displayed.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05


or

• If you do not wish to deactivate the sen-sors, do not choose an alternative and lockthe vehicle or press EXIT and lock the vehi-cle.

CAUTION

• The accessory sensors are automati-cally reconnected to the alarm systemthe next time the vehicle is unlockedand then locked again.

• This function will not turn off the vehi-cle's standard alarm.

U.S.A. FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the following con-ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)

Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operationis subject to the following conditions: (1) thisdevice may not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

05 Locks and alarm

05

135

G020912


General information............................................................................... 138Fuel requirements................................................................................. 142Ignition switch....................................................................................... 145Starting the vehicle............................................................................... 146Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*................................................. 148Manual transmission, 6-speed*............................................................ 149Automatic transmission*....................................................................... 150Shiftlock override.................................................................................. 152Brake system........................................................................................ 153Stability system..................................................................................... 155Towing.................................................................................................. 157Jump starting........................................................................................ 159Transporting loads................................................................................ 160Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*................................................. 161Park assist*........................................................................................... 165

06STARTING AND DRIVING


General information

06

138

Economical driving conserves naturalresources

Better driving economy may be obtained bythinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stopsand adjusting the speed of your vehicle toimmediate traffic conditions.

Observe the following rules:

• Bring the engine to normal operating tem-perature as soon as possible by drivingwith a light foot on the accelerator pedal forthe first few minutes of operation. A coldengine uses more fuel and is subject toincreased wear.

• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehiclefor driving short distances. This does notallow the engine to reach normal operatingtemperature.

• Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelerationand hard braking.

• Use the transmission's Drive (D) positionas often as possible and avoid using kick-down.

• Do not exceed posted speed limits.

• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extraload) in the vehicle.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tirepressure regularly (when tires are cold).

• Remove snow tires when threat of snow orice has ended.

• Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,increase air resistance and also fuel con-sumption.

• At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-tion will be lower with the air conditioningon and the windows closed than with theair conditioning off and the windows open.

• Using the onboard trip computer's fuelconsumption modes can help you learnhow to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

• Dirty air cleaner

• Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

• Dragging brakes

• Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and othersare checked at the standard maintenanceintervals.

WARNING

Driving with the liftgate open: Driving withthe liftgate open could lead to poisonousexhaust gases entering the passenger com-partment. If the liftgate must be kept openfor any reason, proceed as follows:

1. Close the windows.

2. Set the ventilation system control to airflow to floor, windshield and side win-dows and the blower control to its high-est setting.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has atendency to understeer, which means that thesteering wheel has to be turned more thanmight seem appropriate for the curvature of abend. This ensures good stability and reducesthe risk of rear wheel skid. Remember thatthese properties can alter with the vehicle load.The heavier the load in the cargo area, the lessthe tendency to understeer.


General information

06

��

139

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressureall affect vehicle handling. Therefore, checkthat the tires are inflated to the recommendedpressure according to the vehicle load. See the"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-tributed so that capacity weight or maximumpermissible axle loads are not exceeded.

Driving through water

The vehicle can be driven through water up toa depth of approximately 9 in. (25 cm), at amaximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

• Take particular care when driving throughflowing water.

• Clean the electrical connections for trailerwiring after driving in mud or water

• When driving through water, maintain lowspeed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

After driving through water, press lightly onthe brake pedal to ensure that the brakesare functioning normally. Water or mud canmake the brake linings slippery, resulting indelayed braking effect.

CAUTION

• Engine damage will occur if water isdrawn into the air cleaner.

• If the vehicle is driven through waterdeeper than 9 in. (25 cm), water mayenter the differential and the transmis-sion. This reduces the oil's lubricatingcapacity and may shorten the servicelife of these components.

• Do not allow the vehicle to stand inwater up to the door sills longer thanabsolutely necessary. This could resultin electrical malfunctions.

• If the engine has been stopped while thecar is in water, do not attempt to restartthe engine. Have the car towed out ofthe water.

Cold weather precautions

If you wish to check your vehicle before theapproach of cold weather, the following adviceis worth noting:

• Make sure that the engine coolant contains50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixturewill reduce freeze protection. This givesprotection against freezing down to –31 °F(–35 °C). See section "Coolant". The use of"recycled" antifreeze is not approved by

Volvo. Different types of antifreeze mustnot be mixed.

• Volvo recommends using only genuineVolvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvoengine coolant to help protect your vehicleduring cold weather.

• Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – thisprevents the formation of condensation inthe tank. In addition, in extremely coldweather conditions it is worthwhile to addfuel line de-icer before refueling.

• The viscosity of the engine oil is important.Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improvescold-weather starting as well as decreas-ing fuel consumption while the engine iswarming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par-ticularly the synthetic type1, is recom-mended. Be sure to use good quality oil butdo not use cold-weather oil for hard drivingor in warm weather, see page 269 for moreinformation.

• The load placed on the battery is greaterduring the winter since the windshield wip-ers, lighting, etc. are used more often.Moreover, the capacity of the batterydecreases as the temperature drops. Invery cold weather, a poorly charged bat-tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-fore advisable to check the state of charge

1 Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.


General information

06

140

more frequently and spray an anti-rust oilon the battery posts.

• Volvo recommends the use of snow tireson all four wheels for winter driving – seethe chapter "Wheels and tires."

• To prevent the washer fluid reservoir fromfreezing, add washer solvents containingantifreeze (see page 211 for the location ofthe washer fluid reservoir). This is impor-tant since dirt is often splashed on thewindshield during winter driving, requiringthe frequent use of the washers and wip-ers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be dilu-ted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C):1 part washer solvent and 4 parts waterDown to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer sol-vent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F(–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 partswater Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 partwasher solvent and 1 part water.

• Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

NOTE

Avoid using de-icing sprays as they cancause damage to the locks.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimizebattery drain:

• When the engine is not running, avoid turn-ing the ignition key to position II. Manyelectrical systems (the audio system, theoptional navigation system, power win-dows, etc) will function with the ignition keyin position I. This position reduces drain onthe battery.

• Please keep in mind that using systems,accessories, etc that consume a great dealof current when the engine is not runningcould result in the battery being completelydrained.

• The optional 12 volt socket in the cargoarea (certain models only) provides electri-cal current even with the ignition switchedoff, which drains the battery.

NOTE

• If the ignition is switched on, a warningmessage will be displayed in the textwindow in the instrument panel whenthe battery charge is low.

• An energy conserving functiondesigned into the vehicle's electricalsystem will switch off certain functionsor reduce the load on the battery by,e.g., reducing the audio system's vol-ume.

Before a long distance trip

It is always worthwhile to have your vehiclechecked at a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before driving long distances.Your trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician will also be able to supply you withbulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades foryour use in the event that problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should bechecked before any long trip:

• Check that engine runs smoothly and thatfuel consumption is normal.

• Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage

• Have the transmission oil level checked2.

• Check condition of drive belts.

2 To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle's transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle's transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.


General information

06

141

• Check state of the battery's charge.

• Examine tires carefully (the spare tire aswell), and replace those that are worn.Check tire pressures.

• The brakes, front wheel alignment, andsteering gear should be checked by yourVolvo retailer only.

• Check all lights, including high beams.

• Reflective warning triangles are legallyrequired in some states/provinces.

• Have a word with your Volvo retailer if youintend to drive in countries where it may bedifficult to obtain the correct fuel.

• Consider your destination. If you will bedriving through an area where snow or iceare likely to occur, consider snow tires.


Fuel requirements

06

142

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G02

8920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per-formance, but using 87 octane or above will notaffect engine reliability.

Volvo engines are designed to achieve ratedhorsepower, torque, and fuel economy per-formance using premium 91 octane fuel.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,or driving for extended periods at higher alti-tudes than normal, it may be advisable toswitch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or tochange gasoline brands to fully utilize your

engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-sible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel orchanging gasoline brands, it may be neces-sary to fill the tank more than once before adifference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as aknock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-trol systems on your vehicle, lead has beenstrongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.Unburned benzene has been strongly linked tocertain forms of cancer. If you live in an areawhere you must fill your own gas tank, takeprecautions. These may include:

• standing upwind away from the filler nozzlewhile refueling

• refueling only at gas stations with vaporrecovery systems that fully seal the mouthof the filler neck during refueling

• wearing neoprene gloves while handling afuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze duringwinter months, do not add solvents, thicken-ers, or other store-bought additives to yourvehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.Overuse may damage your engine, and someof these additives contain organically volatilechemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourselfto these chemicals.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switchedon while refueling your vehicle. If the phonerings, this may cause a spark that couldignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire andinjury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaustgases. If you ever smell exhaust fumesinside the vehicle, make sure the passengercompartment is ventilated, and immediatelyreturn the vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for correction.


Fuel requirements

06

��

143

Deposit control gasoline (detergentadditives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-oline to control engine deposits. Detergentgasoline is effective in keeping injectors andintake valves clean. Consistent use of depositcontrol gasolines will help ensure good driva-bility and fuel economy. If you are not surewhether the gasoline contains deposit controladditives, check with the service station oper-ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use ofstore-bought fuel injector cleaning addi-tives.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converterand must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. andCanadian regulations require that pumps deliv-ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA-DED". Only these pumps have nozzles whichfit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasolinedamages the three-way catalytic converter andthe heated oxygen sensor system. Repeateduse of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

ness of the emission control system and couldresult in loss of emission warranty coverage.State and local vehicle inspection programswill make detection of misfueling easier, pos-sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines containan octane enhancing additive called methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). If such fuels are used, your EmissionControl System performance may be affec-ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-tion indicator lamp) located on your instru-ment panel may light. If this occurs, pleasereturn your vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for maintenance.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols orethers. In some areas, state or local lawsrequire that the service pump be marked indi-cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,there are areas in which the pumps areunmarked. If you are not sure whether there isalcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, checkwith the service station operator. To meet sea-sonal air quality standards, some areas requirethe use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the

use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; how-ever, the octane ratings listed on this pagemust still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10%ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol mayalso be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gaso-hol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15%MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practicecan result in vehicle performance deteriorationand can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-tem. Such damage may not be covered underthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel (seethe illustration on page 63) with the ignition

switched off to unlock the fuel filler door.Please note that the fuel filler door will remainunlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-ward. An audible click will be heard when thefuel filler door relocks.

If you intend to leave your vehicle while it isbeing refueled, this feature enables you to lockthe doors/liftgate while leaving the fuel fillerdoor unlocked.


Fuel requirements

06

144

You can also keep the vehicle locked if youremain inside it during refueling. The centrallocking button does not lock the fuel filler door.

Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed andis completely closed after refueling. Open the

fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather.

Refueling

The fuel tank is designed to accommodatepossible expansion of the fuel in hot weather,see page 267 for fuel tank volume. Be awarethat the "usable" tank capacity will be some-what less than the specified maximum. Whenthe fuel level is low, such factors as ambienttemperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuelpump's ability to supply the engine with anadequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis-able to refuel as soon as possible when theneedle nears the red zone, or when the fuelwarning light comes on.

CAUTION

• Do not refuel with the engine running1.Turn the ignition off or to position I. If theignition is on, an incorrect reading couldoccur in the fuel gauge

• After refueling, close the fuel filler capby turning it clockwise until it clicks intoplace.

• Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do notpress the handle on the filler nozzlemore than one extra time. Too much fuelin the tank in hot weather conditions cancause the fuel to overflow. Overfillingcould also cause damage to the emis-sion control systems.

• Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.In addition to causing damage to theenvironment, gasolines containingalcohol can cause damage to paintedsurfaces, which may not be coveredunder the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

• Do not use gasolines containing meth-anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).This practice can result in vehicle per-formance deterioration and can dam-age critical parts in the fuel system.Such damage may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

1 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle’sperformance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.


Ignition switch

06

145

Ignition switch positions

0 – Locked position

Remove the key to lock thesteering wheel1. Never turnthe key to position 0 whiledriving or when the vehicle isbeing towed.

NOTE

A ticking sound may be audible if the key isturned to a position between 0 and I. Tostop this sound, turn the key to position IIand back to position 0.

I – Intermediate position2

Certain accessories, radio,etc. on, daytime running lightsoff.

II – Drive position

The key's position when driv-ing. The vehicle's entire elec-trical system is activated.

III – Start position

Turn the key to this positionand release it immediately.The key returns automaticallyto the Drive position.

A chime will sound if the keyis left in the ignition and the

driver's door is opened (does not apply to vehi-cles with the optional keyless drive).

1 Automatic transmission: the gear selector must be in the Park position. The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed.2 Please be aware that leaving the key in this positions I or II will increase battery drain.


Starting the vehicle

06

146

To start the engine

WARNING

Before starting, check that the seat, steeringwheel and mirrors are adjusted properly.Make sure the brake pedal can bedepressed completely. Adjust the seat ifnecessary.

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Apply the parking brake if not already set.The gear selector should be locked in thePark (P) position (Shiftlock). See also page152.

Manual transmission: The clutch must befully depressed.

NOTE

After a cold start, idle speed may be notice-ably higher than normal for a short period.This is done to help bring components in theemission control system to their normaloperating temperature as quickly as possi-ble, which enables them to control emis-sions and help reduce the vehicle's impacton the environment.

3. The vehicle is equipped with an autostartfeature. Without touching the throttlepedal, turn the key to position III andrelease it. The starter motor will then oper-ate automatically (for up to ten seconds)until the engine starts. If the engine fails tostart, repeat this step.

4. To release the gear selector from the Park(P) position, the engine must be running (orthe ignition key must be in position II) andthe brake pedal must be depressed.

5. Select the desired gear. On models with anautomatic transmission, the gear engagesafter a very slight delay which is especiallynoticeable when selecting R.

NOTE

• Immobilizer: If two of the keys to yourvehicle are close together, e.g., on thesame key ring when you try to start thevehicle, this could cause interference inthe immobilizer system and result in thevehicle not starting. If this should occur,remove one of the keys from the keyring before trying to start the vehicleagain.

• Keylock: Models equipped an auto-matic transmission have a keylock sys-tem. When the engine is switched off,the gear selector must be in the Park(P) position before the key can beremoved from the ignition switch1.

• When starting in cold weather, thetransmission may shift up at slightlyhigher engine speeds than normal untilthe automatic transmission fluid rea-ches normal operating temperature.

• Do not race a cold engine immediatelyafter starting. Oil flow may not reachsome lubrication points fast enough toprevent engine damage.

1 The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed from the ignition switch.


Starting the vehicle

06

147

WARNING

Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac-tured for your car. They must be firmlysecured in the clips on the floor so that theycannot slide and become trapped under thepedals on the driver's side.

• Always place the gear selector in Park(P) (manual transmission: first or reversegear) and apply the parking brakebefore leaving the vehicle.and apply theparking brake before leaving the vehi-cle. Never leave the vehicle unattendedwith the engine running.

• Always open garage doors fully beforestarting the engine inside a garage toensure adequate ventilation. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monox-ide, which is invisible and odorless butvery poisonous.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission: The engineshould be idling when you move the gearselector. Never accelerate until after youfeel the transmission engage! Acceleratingimmediately after selecting a gear will causeharsh engagement and premature trans-mission wear. Selecting P or N when idlingat a standstill for prolonged periods of timewill help prevent overheating of the auto-matic transmission fluid.


Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*

06


Starting a vehicle with keyless drive

G019410

Keyless drive makes it possible to unlock, startand lock the vehicle without using a remotekey.

A start control is fitted in the ignition switch onvehicles equipped with the optional keylessdrive. This control is used in the same way asthe ignition key to start the engine. See alsopage 146 for general information on startingthe engine.

NOTE

A keyless drive remote key must be insidethe vehicle in order to start the engine.

1. Press the brake pedal (the clutch pedalmust also be fully depressed on modelswith a manual transmission).

2. Press in the keyless drive start control andturn it to position III.

NOTE

The vehicle is equipped with an autostartfunction that makes it possible to start theengine without holding the start control inposition III. Turn the start control to posi-tion III and release it. The starter motor willthen operate automatically (for up to tenseconds) until the engine starts.

Starting the vehicle with the ignition key

(remote key)

A vehicle with keyless drive can also be startedwith the ignition key (if, for example, the batteryin the keyless drive remote key is weak). To doso:

G019420

Removing the keyless drive start control

Press the catch on the side of the start con-trol (see the illustration).

Pull the keyless drive start control out of theignition switch.

Insert the remote key into the ignition switchand turn it to position III to start the engine,page 146 for complete starting information.


Manual transmission, 6-speed*

06


6-speed manual transmission

G018258

• Depress the clutch pedal completely whenchanging gears1

• Remove your foot from the clutch pedalwhile driving. The shift pattern should befollowed.

• Overdrive (5th and 6th gears) should beused as often as possible to help improvefuel economy.

Engaging reverse gear, 6-speedtransmission

G018259

Reverse gear should only be engaged from acomplete stop.

NOTE

Reverse gear is electronically blocked tohelp prevent it from being selected while thevehicle is moving foward.

CAUTION

Never shift into reverse while moving for-ward.

WARNING

An extra mat on the driver's floor can causethe accelerator, brake, and/or clutch pedalto catch. Check that the movement of thesepedals is not impeded. Not more than oneprotective floor covering may be used atone time.

1 Clutch interlock: The clutch must be fully depressed before you can start your car. If the clutch is notdepressed, it will not be possible to start the engine.


Automatic transmission*

06


Shiftgate positions

G020237

Depress the button on the front of the gearselector knob to move the selector betweenthe R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freely betweenthe Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)positions while driving.

Gear selector positions

P – Park

Select the P position when starting or parking.

In P, the transmission is mechanically blocked(Shiftlock). Always apply the parking brakewhen parking.

G018264

D - left position: automatic shifting, M - right posi-tion: manual shifting

CAUTION

The car must be stationary when selectingposition P.

R – Reverse

The car must be stationary when shifting toposition R.

N – Neutral

N is the neutral position. The engine can bestarted, but no gear is selected. Apply the park-ing brake when the car is stationary with thegear selector in N.

NOTE

If the gear selector is in the Neutral positionand the vehicle has been at a standstill forat least 3 seconds, the brake pedal must bepressed before the gear selector can bemoved to another position.

In order to move the gear selector to anotherposition:

1. Turn the ignition key to position II (if theengine is not already running).

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Move the gear selector to the desired posi-tion.

D – Drive

D is the normal driving position. The Drive posi-tion offers 5 forward gears1. The car automat-ically shifts between the various forward gears,

1 T5 models have 6 forward gears.


Automatic transmission*

06


based on the level of acceleration and speed.The car must be at a standstill when shifting toposition D from position R.

Manual shifting – Geartronic

The manual shifting mode (Geartronic) can beselected at any time to manually select forwardgears, including while the car is moving.

NOTE

Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot beselected in Geartronic mode.

• To access the Manual (M) shifting positionfrom Drive (D), move the gear selector tothe right to M.

• To return to the Drive (D) position from M,move the gear selector to the left.

While driving

• If you select the M position while driving,the gear that was being used in the Driveposition will also initially be selected in theM position.

• Move the gear selector forward(toward "+") to shift to a higher gear orrearward (toward "–") to shift to a lowergear.

• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", thetransmission will downshift one gear at a

time and will utilize the braking power ofthe engine. If the current speed is too highfor using a lower gear, the downshift willnot occur until the speed has decreasedenough to allow the lower gear to be used.

• If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-mission will automatically shift down.

Cold starts (turbo engines)

When driving before the engine has reached itsnormal operating temperature, the transmis-sion will shift up at slightly higher enginespeeds to heat the three-way catalytic con-verter as quickly as possible.

Kickdown

Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) isachieved by depressing the accelerator pedalfully and briskly. An upshift will occur whenapproaching the top speed for a particular gearor by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly.Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler-ation or when passing at highway speeds.

Safety function

To help prevent excessive engine speeds (rpm)that could lead to engine damage, the enginemanagement system includes a function thatprevents kickdown from taking place if theengine speed is too high.

Kickdown will not occur if the driver attemptsto use this function when engine speeds aretoo high. The transmission will remain in thecurrently selected gear.


Shiftlock override

06

152

Overriding the shiftlock system

G018263

Shiftlock prevents the gear selector from beingmoved out of the Pposition unless the ignitionkey is in position II and the brake pedal isdepressed.

In certain cases it may be necessary to movethe gear selector from the Pposition manually.

To manually override the Shiftlock

system:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. There is a small cover below P-R-N-D onthe gear selector panel. Open the rear edgeof the panel.

4. Insert the key blade, see page 124, into theopening and press it down until it bottoms.

5. With the key blade pressed down, movethe gear selector out of the P position.


Brake system

06

��

153

Brake circuit malfunction

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob-lem should occur in one of these circuits, it isstill possible to stop the vehicle with the otherbrake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed fartherthan normal and requires greater foot pressure,the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will lightup to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,stop immediately and check the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintainpressure on the pedal – do not pump thebrakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in thereservoir or if a brake system message isshown in the information display, DO NOTDRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a Volvoretailer and have the brake system inspec-ted.

Power brakes function only when theengine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressurewhich is only created when the engine is run-ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with theengine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consider-ably higher pressure will be required on thebrake pedal to compensate for the lack ofpower assistance. This can happen for exam-ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine isswitched off when the vehicle is rolling. Thebrake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake padsaffects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through anautomatic car wash can cause water to collecton the brake discs and pads. This will cause adelay in braking effect when the pedal isdepressed. To avoid such a delay when thebrakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.This will remove the water from the brakes.Check that brake application feels normal. Thisshould also be done after washing or startingin very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strainwhen driving in mountains or hilly areas, orwhen towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usuallyslower, which means that the cooling of thebrakes is less efficient than when driving onlevel roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,shift into a lower gear and let the engine helpwith the braking. Do not forget that if you aretowing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected toa greater than normal load.

Anti-lock brakes (ABS)

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps toimprove vehicle control (stopping and steering)during severe braking conditions by limitingbrake lockup. When the system "senses"impending lockup, braking pressure is auto-matically modulated in order to help preventlockup that could lead to a skid.

The system performs a self-diagnostic test

when the engine is started and when the

vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal willpulsate several times and a sound may beaudible from the ABS control module. This isnormal.


Brake system

06

154

For optimal ABS braking effect:

1. Press down on the brake pedal with fullforce. The pedal will pulsate.

2. Steer the vehicle in the direction of traveland keep the brake pedal depressed.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD)

EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to therear brakes to help provide optimal brakingcapacity.

The switching of the ABS modulator will beaudible and the brake pedal will pulsate duringbraking. Please be aware that ABS does notincrease the absolute braking potential of thevehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABSwill not shorten stopping distances on slipperysurfaces.

If the warning lamp lights up there is a mal-function of the ABS system (the standard brak-ing system will still function) and the vehicleshould be driven cautiously to a trained andqualified Volvo service technician for inspec-tion.

WARNING

If the BRAKES and ABS warning symbolslight at the same time, there may be a prob-lem in the brake system. If the brake fluidlevel is normal in these circumstances, drivecarefully to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician to have the brake systemchecked.

Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA

EBA is designed to provide full brake effectimmediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-ing. The system is activated by the speed withwhich the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brakepedal will go down and pressure in the brakesystem immediately increases to the maximumlevel. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedalin order to utilize the system completely. EBAis automatically deactivated when the brakepedal is released.

NOTE

• When the EBA system is activated, thebrake pedal will go down and pressurein the brake system immediately increa-ses to the maximum level. You mustmaintain full pressure on the brakepedal in order to utilize the system com-pletely. There will be no braking effect ifthe pedal is released. EBA is automati-cally deactivated when the brake pedalis released.

• When the vehicle has been parked forsome time, the brake pedal may sinkmore than usual when the engine isstarted. This is normal and the pedal willreturn to its usual position when it isreleased.


Stability system

06

��

155

Dynamic Stability Traction Control(DSTC)

The stability system consists of a number offunctions designed help reduce wheel spin,counteract skidding, and to generally helpimprove directional stability.

A pulsating sound will be audible when thesystem is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheelspin by transferring power from a drive wheelthat begins to lose traction to the wheel on theopposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of the stability system's permanentfunctions and cannot be switched off.

G020349

Thumb wheel

RESET button

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to helpprevent the drive wheels from spinning whilethe vehicle is accelerating.

Under certain circumstances, such as whendriving with snow chains, or driving in deepsnow or loose sand, it may be advisable totemporarily switch off this function for maxi-mum tractive force.

Temporarily switching off Spin control

1. Turn the thumbwheel (A) on the left-sidesteering wheel lever until the DSTC menuis displayed.

2. Hold down the RESET button (B) to togglebetween DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON orOFF.

NOTE

• The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL

OFF indicates that the stability sys-tem's spin control function has tempo-rarily been switched off.

• The stability control indicator light will illuminate and remain on until spincontrol has been reactivated.

• The spin control function is automati-cally enabled each time the engine isstarted.

• DSTC ON indicates that all systemfunctions are active.

Active yaw control – AYC (DSTC only)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-ity, for example when cornering, by brakingone or more of the wheels if the vehicle showsa tendency to skid or slide laterally.


Stability system

06

156

This is one of the stability system's permanentfunctions and cannot be switched off.

WARNING

The car's handling and stability characteris-tics will be altered if the DSTC system func-tions have been disabled.

DSTC-related messages in the text

window

• "TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF" – The system has been temporarilyswitched off due to high brake temperatureand will automatically switch on againwhen the brakes have cooled.

• "ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – thesystem has been automatically disen-gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician retailer shouldcheck the system.

Symbols used by the stability system

Stability system indicator light

Information symbol

If the and symbols light up at the sametime, read the message in the display.

If only the symbol lights up, this indicatesone of the following situations:

• The light illuminates for approximately2 seconds to indicate that the system isperforming a self-diagnostic test when theengine is started.

• If the light flashes while driving, this indi-cates that the stability system is activelyfunctioning to help counteract wheel spinand/or a skid.

• If this light stays on after the engine hasstarted or comes on while driving, theremay be a fault in the stability system. Con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

• If Spin control has been intentionallyswitched off, a message is displayed andthe light will stay on as a reminder that thisfunction has been disabled by the driver.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to helpimprove driving safety. It supplements, butcan never replace, the driver's judgementand responsibility when operating the vehi-cle. Speed and driving style should alwaysbe adapted to traffic and road conditions.


Towing

06

��

157

Emergency towing

3

G007607

The towing eyelet is located under the floor ofthe cargo area. This eyelet must be screwedinto the positions provided on the right sides ofeither the front or rear bumper (see the illustra-tion).

To attach the towing eyelet:

1. Press the mark on the lower edge of thecover (1) to open it.

2. Screw the towing eyelet (3) in place first byhand and then using the tire iron until it issecurely in place.

� After the vehicle has been towed, the eye-let should be removed and returned to itsstorage space.

� Press the cover back into position.

WARNING

Do not use the towing eyelets to pull thevehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.

Towing a vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground

WARNING

Volvo does not recommend towing a disa-bled vehicle behind another vehicle. Signif-icant difficulty in steering and braking, com-bined with unfavorable weather, traffic, androad conditions may make it impossible tomaintain vehicle control.


WARNING

Towing a vehicle with a locked steeringwheel will make the vehicle impossible tosteer.

2. Insert the key into the ignition to unlock thesteering wheel. The steering wheel must be

unlocked. With the engine off and the vehi-cle at a standstill, great effort will berequired to turn the steering wheel.


4. Place the gear selector in neutral. For vehi-cles with automatic transmissions, followinstruction on page 152, "Shiftlock over-ride" to allow the gear selector to be movedfrom the Park position.

5. Keep firm pressure on the brake pedalwhile releasing the parking brake.

6. When towing has been completed, returnthe gear selector to Park (automatic) orReverse (manual) and apply the parkingbrake.

The following points should also be

observed:

• Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Neverexceed local towing speed limits and heedall local towing restrictions.

• Never tow farther than 50 miles (80 km).

• Keep the tow rope taut at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

• The disabled vehicle should be towed inthe forward direction only.


Towing

06

158

WARNING

• Never allow a vehicle to be towed with-out a driver behind the wheel of the dis-abled vehicle.

• Never remove the key from the ignitionwhile the vehicle is moving. The steeringwheel could lock, making it impossibleto steer the vehicle.

• When the engine is not running, steeringresistance and the effort needed toapply the brakes will be great.

• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with adead battery at night.

CAUTION

• Check with state and local authoritiesbefore attempting this type of towing,as vehicles being towed are subject toregulations regarding maximum towingspeed, length and type of towingdevice, lighting, marker flags, etc.

• Never attempt to push- or tow-start avehicle with a dead battery. This wouldinject unburned fuel into the three-waycatalytic converter(s), causing over-heating, backfiring, and damage, seepage 159 for instructions on jump star-ting the vehicle.

Towing vehicles with front wheel drive

Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-ment for towing vehicles with front wheel drive.If wheel lift equipment must be used, pleaseuse extreme caution to help avoid damage tothe vehicle.

In this case, the vehicle should be towed withthe rear wheels on the ground if at all possible.

If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehiclewith the front wheels on the ground, pleaserefer to the towing information on the previouspage.

• Sling-type equipment applied at the frontwill damage radiator and air conditioninglines.

• It is equally important not to use sling-typeequipment at the rear or apply lifting equip-ment inside the rear wheels; serious dam-age to the rear axle may result.

• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not be usedto secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Con-sult the tow truck operator.

WARNING

• Remember that the power brakes andpower steering will not function whenengine is not running. The braking andsteering systems will function but con-siderably higher pressure will berequired on the brake pedal and greatersteering effort must be exerted.

• The towing eyelets must not be used forpulling the vehicle out of a ditch or forany similar purpose involving severestrain. Do not use the towing eyelets topull the vehicle up onto a flat bed towtruck.


Jump starting

06

159

Jump starting the vehicle

G020298

Follow these instructions to jump start yourvehicle's dead battery or to jump start anothervehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in anothervehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch-ing to prevent premature completion of a cir-cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in

your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a"+" sign.

3. Connect the auxiliary battery's negative (–)terminal (3) to the ground point in yourvehicle's engine compartment near thedriver's side spring strut (4).

4. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,then start the engine in the vehicle withdead battery.

5. After the engine has started, first removethe negative (–) terminal jumper cable.Then remove the positive (+) terminaljumper cable.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

• Do not connect the jumper cable to anypart of the fuel system or to any movingparts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

• Batteries generate hydrogen gas, whichis flammable and explosive.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Failure to follow the instructions forjump starting can lead to personalinjury.

• Do not touch the jumper cables duringthe attempt to start the vehicle. Thiscould cause sparks.


Transporting loads

06

160

Loading the vehicle

Your vehicle's load-carrying capacity is affec-ted by factors such as:

• the number of passengers

• tire inflation

• the amount of optional or accessory equip-ment installed

• the amount of cargo.

See the chapter "Wheels and tires" for moredetailed information.

Before loading the car, turn off the engine, andapply the parking brake when loading orunloading long objects. The gear selector canbe inadvertently knocked out of position bylong cargo, causing the car to move.

Keep the following in mind whenloading the vehicle:

• Load objects in the cargo area against therear seat backrest.

• Load heavy cargo as low as possible.

• Center wide loads.

• Secure all cargo with restraining strapsanchored to the load securing eyelets.

• Cover sharp edges on the load.

• The rear seats can be folded down toextend the cargo compartment, seepage 115.

WARNING

• Remember that an object weighing44 lbs (20 kg) produces a force of2,200 lbs (1,000 kg) in a head-on colli-sion at 30 mph (50 km/h)!

• When the rear backrest(s) are foldeddown, the vehicle should not be loadedto a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) belowthe upper edge of the rear side win-dows. Objects placed higher than thislevel could impede the function of theVolvo Inflatable Curtain.

Load carriers (accessory)

Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso-ries. Follow the installation instructions sup-plied with the load carriers.

Observe the following points when using loadcarriers:

• To avoid damaging your car and to achievemaximum safety when driving, we recom-mend using the load carriers that Volvo hasdeveloped especially for your car.

• Volvo-approved removable roof racks aredesigned to carry the maximum allowableroof load for this vehicle: 165 lbs (75 kg).For Non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

• Never exceed the rack manufacturer'sweigh limits and never exceed the maxi-mum rated roof load of 165 lbs (75 kg).

• Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loadsevenly.

• Place heavier cargo at the bottom of theload.

• Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-ate tie-down equipment.

• Check periodically that the load carriersand load are properly secured.

• Remember that the car's center of gravityand handling change when you carry aload on the roof.

• The car's wind resistance and fuel con-sumption will increase with the size of theload.

• Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fastcornering and hard braking.



06

��


Introduction

G020295

BLIS camera

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is aninformation system that indicates the presenceof another vehicle moving in the same directionas your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blindarea".

CAUTION

The BLIS system should only be repaired bya trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

WARNING

• BLIS is an information system, NOT awarning or safety system.

• BLIS does not eliminate the need foryou to visually confirm the conditionsaround you, and the need for you to turnyour head and shoulders to make surethat you can safely change lanes.

• As the driver, you have full responsibilityfor changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera tech-nology. The cameras (1) are located beneaththe side-view mirrors.

When one (or both) of the cameras havedetected a vehicle in the blind area (up toapproximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side ofyour vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), theindicator light in the door panel (2) illuminates.The light will glow continuously to alert thedriver of the vehicle in the blind area.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates onthe side of the vehicle where the system hasdetected another vehicle. If your vehicle ispassed on both sides at the same time, bothlights will illuminate.

A

B

G020296

A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters), B = approx. 31 ft.(9.5 meters)

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts thedriver if a fault should occur with the system.For example, if one or both of the system'scameras are obscured, a message (see thetable on page 164) will appear in the informa-tion display in the instrument panel. If thisoccurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,the system can be temporarily switched off (forinstructions see page 163).



06


When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle ismoving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

When you pass another vehicle:

The system reacts when you pass anothervehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another vehicle:

The system reacts if your vehicle is passed byanother vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

• BLIS does not function in sharp curves.

• BLIS does not function when your vehi-cle is backing up.

• If you are towing a wide trailer, this mayprevent the BLIS cameras from detect-ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

How BLIS functions in daylight and

darkness

Daylight

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-cles. The system is designed to help detectmotor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,motorcycles, etc.

Darkness

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surroundingvehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, avehicle in the blind area must have its head-lights on. This means, for example, that thesystem will not detect a trailer without head-lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

• BLIS does not react to cyclists ormopeds.

• BLIS does not react to vehicles that arestanding still.

• The function of the BLIS cameras maybe affected by intense light, or whendriving at night in areas where there areno external sources of light (e.g., streetlights, other vehicles, etc.). In suchcases, the system may react as if thecameras were obscured.

• In both of the above mentioned condi-tions, a message will appear in the infor-mation display.

• When driving in such conditions, thesystem's function will be limited or itmay be temporarily switched off, seepage 163 for instructions.

• When the message is no longer dis-played, BLIS will return to normal func-tion.

• The BLIS cameras have the same limi-tation as the human eye. In other words,their "vision is impaired" by adverseweather conditions such as heavysnowfall, dense fog, etc.



06

��


Limitations

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)may illuminate even when there are no othervehicles in the area monitored by the system.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-sionally even when there are no other vehi-cles in the blind area, this does not indicatea fault in the system.

In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa-tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) mayilluminate even when there are no other vehi-cles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

G018177

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,smooth surface such as barriers between lanes ona highway

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is lowon the horizon

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses

In order to function optimally, the BLIS cameralenses must be kept clean. They can be wipedclean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

CAUTION

• Clean the lenses carefully to avoidscratching.

• The lenses are electrically heated tohelp melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-tly brush away snow from the lenses.

Switching BLIS on and off

G018270

BLIS button (left button in the illustration)

BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-tion is switched on. The indicator lights willprovide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

• The system can be switched off by press-ing the BLIS button in the center console.The indicator light in the button goes out



06


when the system is switched off, and a textmessage is displayed.

• BLIS can be switched on again by pressingthe button. The indicator light in the buttonwill illuminate and a new text message willbe displayed. Press the READ button, seepage 60, to erase the message.

BLIS system messages

Text in thedisplay

System status

BLIS service

required

BLIS not functioningproperly. Contact anauthorized Volvo serv-ice technician.

BLIS camera

blocked

BLIS camera obscured.Clean the lenses.

BLIS ON BLIS system on

BLIS OFF BLIS system off

BLIS reduced

function

The BLIS cameras'function has beenreduced by e.g., fog, orstrong sunlight directlyinto the camera. Thecamera will reset itselfwhen these conditionshave changed.


Park assist*

06

��


Introduction

Front/rear park assist

The park assist system is designed to assistyou when driving into parking spaces, garages,etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors locatedin one or both bumpers to measure the dis-tance to a vehicle, object or a person who maybe close to the front or rear of your vehicle.

Park assist is available in two versions:

• Rear bumper only

• Front and rear bumpers

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT asafety system. This system is designed tobe a supplementary aid when parking thevehicle. It is not, however, intended toreplace the driver's attention and judge-ment.

Function

The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-ton in the center console illuminates.

• The front park assist system is active fromthe time the engine is started until the vehi-cle exceeds a speed of approximately10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when thevehicle is backing up.

• Rear park assist is active when the engineis running and reverse gear has beenselected.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle isapproximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comesfrom the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towinga trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mountedcarrier, etc, which could trigger the rear parkassist system's sensors.

NOTE

Rear park assist is deactivated automati-cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuinetrailer wiring is used.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicleis approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-nal comes from the audio system's frontspeakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliaryheadlights and front park assist since theselights could trigger the system's sensors.


Park assist*

06


Activating/deactivating park assist

G021267

Park Assist button (right button in the illustration)

The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started.

� Press the Park assist button on the centerconsole to temporarily deactivate the sys-tem(s). The indicator light in the button willgo out when the system has been deacti-vated.

� Park assist will be automatically reactiva-ted the next time the engine is started, or ifthe button is pressed (the indicator light inthe button will illuminate).

NOTE

• Front park assist is disengaged auto-matically when the parking brake isapplied.

• If the vehicle is equipped with front andrear park assist, both systems will bedeactivated by pressing the button.

Audible signals from the park assistsystem

The Park Assist system uses an intermittenttone that pulses faster as you come close to anobject, and becomes constant when you arewithin approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an objectin front of or behind the vehicle. If the volumeof another source from the audio system ishigh, this will be automatically lowered.

If there are objects within this distance bothbehind and in front of the vehicle, the signalalternates between front and rear speakers.

Faults in the system

If the information symbol illumi-nates and PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED is shownon the information display, thisindicates that the system is not

functioning properly and has been disengaged.Consult a Volvo retailer or authorized Volvoservice technician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assistsystem may give unexpected warning sig-nals that can be caused by external soundsources that use the same ultrasound fre-quencies as the system. This may includesuch things as the horns of other vehicles,wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This doesnot indicate a fault in the system.


Park assist*

06


Cleaning the sensors

G007601

Park assist sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and a suitable car washing deter-gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may causeincorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-ing signals from the park assist system.

G020918

168

General information............................................................................... 170Tire inflation........................................................................................... 173Inflation pressure—U.S. models .......................................................... 175Inflation pressure—Canadian models .................................................. 176Tire designations................................................................................... 177Glossary of tire terminology.................................................................. 179Vehicle loading...................................................................................... 180Uniform tire quality gradings................................................................. 181Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................ 182Temporary spare................................................................................... 183Wheel nuts............................................................................................ 184Changing a wheel................................................................................. 185Tire Sealing System ............................................................................. 187Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 193

07WHEELS AND T IRES

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

170

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires accordingto the vehicle's tire information placard on theB-pillar (the structural member at the side ofthe vehicle, at the rear of the driver's dooropening), or on the inside of the fuel filler dooron Canadian models.

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with anUltra High Performance tire and wheel com-bination designed to provide maximum drypavement performance with considerationfor hydroplaning resistance. As such, theymay be more susceptible to road hazarddamage and, depending on driving condi-tions, may achieve a tread life of less than20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehi-cle is equipped with Volvo’s advancedDSTC system, these tires are not designedfor winter driving, and should be replacedwith winter tires when weather conditionsdictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-tics and offer good handling on dry and wetsurfaces. It should be noted however that thetires have been developed to give these fea-tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Certain models are equipped with "all-season"tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

of road holding on slippery surfaces than tireswithout the "all-season" rating. However, foroptimum road holding on icy or snow-coveredroads, we recommend suitable winter tires onall four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tiresare the same size designation, type (radial) andpreferably from the same manufacturer, on allfour wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of alteringthe car's roadholding and handling characte-ristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are per-ishable goods. As of 2000, themanufacturing week and year(Department of Transporta-tion (DOT) stamp) will be indi-cated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502means that the tire illustrated

was manufactured during week 15 of 2002).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they arenot being used. It is recommended that tiresgenerally be replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot climates, frequenthigh loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)exposure can accelerate the aging process.

You should replace the spare tire when youreplace the other road tires due to the aging ofthe spare.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOTstamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discolorationshould be replaced immediately.

Improving tire economy

• Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tirepressure tables, see page 175.

• Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hardbraking and tire screeching.

• Tire wear increases with speed.

• Correct front wheel alignment is veryimportant.

• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economyand driving comfort.

• Tires must maintain the same direction ofrotation throughout their lifetime.

• When replacing tires, the tires with themost tread should be mounted on the rearwheels to reduce the chance of oversteerduring hard braking.

• Hitting curbs or potholes can damage thetires and/or wheels permanently.

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

��

171

Summer and winter tires

G020325

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of thetire

• When switching between summer andwinter tires, mark the tires to indicatewhere they were mounted on the car, e.g.,LF = left front, RR = right rear

• Tires with tread designed to roll in only onedirection are marked with an arrow on thesidewall.

• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car'sbraking properties and ability to forceaside rain, snow and slush.

• The tires with the most tread should alwaysbe at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-ding).

• Contact a Volvo workshop if you areunsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mountedon rims), they should be suspended off thefloor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored ontheir sides or standing upright, but should notbe suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,dry, dark place, and should never be storedin close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,etc.

WARNING

• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvoare specified to meet stringent stabilityand handling requirements. Unap-proved wheel/tire size combinationscan negatively affect your vehicle's sta-bility and handling. Approved tire sizesare shown in the Tire inflation pressuretables, see page 175.

• Any damage caused by installation ofunapproved wheel/tire size combina-tions will not be covered by your newvehicle warranty. Volvo assumes noresponsibility for death, injury, orexpenses that may result from suchinstallations.

Tire wear

Tire rotation

Tire wear is affected by a number of factorssuch as tire inflation, ambient temperature,driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainlyby the front tires, which will wear faster.

If the tires are rotated, they should only bemoved from front to back or vice versa. Theyshould never be rotated left to right/right to left.

However, tire rotation, done at the recom-mended intervals, is one way of helping to keep

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

172

tread wear as even as possible and will helpyou get maximum mileage from your tires.

Ideally, tire rotation should be done the firsttime after approximately 3,000 miles(5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile(10,000 km) intervals.

Tire rotation should only be performed if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height isabove 1/16" (1.6 mm).

NOTE

Tire rotation is not included in regularlyscheduled maintenance and is performedonly at customer request, at additionalcharge.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidancebased on your particular driving circumstan-ces.

Tread wear indicator

G020323

The tires have wear indicator strips runningacross or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. Whenapproximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on thetread, these strips become visible and indicatethat the tire should be replaced. Tires with lessthan 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-tion.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommendedthat the tire be identical in type (radial) and sizeas the one being replaced. Using a tire of thesame make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

07

��

173

Inflation labels

G032513

Tire inflation placard on U.S. models

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

Tables listing the recommended inflation pres-sure for your vehicle can be found on page175. A tire inflation pressure placard is alsolocated on the driver's side B-pillar (the struc-tural member at the side of the vehicle, at therear of the driver's door opening). This placardindicates the designation of the factory-moun-ted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limitsand inflation pressure.

G032520

Tire inflation placard on Canadian models

NOTE

The placards shown indicate inflation pres-sure for the tires installed on the car at thefactory only.

Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pres-sure, including the spare, at least once a monthand before long trips. You are strongly urgedto buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as auto-matic service station gauges may be inaccu-rate.

Use the recommended cold inflation pressurefor optimum tire performance and wear.

Under-inflation or over-inflation may causeuneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

• Under-inflation is the most commoncause of tire failure and may result insevere tire cracking, tread separation,or "blowout," with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased risk ofinjury.

• Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-rying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tireinflation pressures also change. A 10-degreetemperature drop causes a correspondingdrop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Checkyour tire pressures frequently and adjust themto the proper pressure, which can be found onthe vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-cation label.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

07

174

Checking tire pressure

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when thetires are cold.

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after thecar has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. Ifyou have to drive farther than this distance topump your tire(s), check and record the tirepressure first and add the appropriate air pres-sure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tiresare hot from driving and it is normal for pres-sures to increase above recommended coldpressures. A hot tire at or below recommendedcold inflation pressure could be significantlyunder-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,then firmly press the tire gauge onto thevalve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended airpressure

3. Replace the valve cap.

4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-ing the spare.

5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure thereare no nails or other objects embeddedthat could puncture the tire and cause anair leak.

6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there areno gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-ities.

NOTE

• If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the valve. Then recheck the pressurewith your tire gauge.

• Some spare tires require higher inflationpressure than the other tires. Consultthe tire inflation tables, see page 175,or see the inflation pressure placard.

Load ratings

The load ratings in the tables above translateas follows:

91 = 1365 lbs (615 kg),

93 = 1433 lbs (650 kg),

99 = 1709 lbs (755 kg).

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the tables translate as fol-lows:

M = 81 mph (130 km/h),

V = 149 mph (240 km/h),

W = 168 mph (270 km/h).

See also page 177 for an explanation of thedesignations on the sidewall of the tire.

07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—U.S. models

07

175

Tire inflation pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommendedby Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

tion placard for information specific to the tiresinstalled on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure up to four persons psi (kPa)

Front Rear

205/55R16 91V M+S 32 (220) 32 (220)

205/50R17 93V

Extra Load M+S

35 (240) 35 (240)

215/45R18A 93W

Extra load

35 (240) 35 (240)

Temporary spare tire

T125/85R16 99M

61 (420) 61 (420)

A Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system.

07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—Canadian models

07

176

Tire inflation pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommendedby Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

tion placard for information specific to the tiresinstalled on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressures

Up to four persons

psi (kPa)

Optional pressure

Up to three personsA

psi (kPa)

Front Rear Front Rear

205/55R16 91V M+S 36 (250) 36 (250) 30 (210) 30 (210)

205/50R17 93V Extra LoadM+S

36 (250) 36 (250) 35 (240) 32 (220)

215/45R18 93W ExtraloadB

36 (250) 36 (250) 35 (240) 32 (220)

Temporary spare tire

T125/85R16 99M

61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420)

A Optional pressure may not be used for homologation of fuel consumption or emissions.B Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

07

��

177

Tire designations

1

2

3

4

5

6

12

11

10

8

7 9

G026442

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturersplace standardized information on the sidewallof all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tiresidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire des-ignation is an example only and that thisparticular tire may not be available on yourvehicle.

215: The width of the tire (in millimeters)from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. Thelarger the number, the wider the tire.

65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width.

R: Radial tire.

15: The diameter of the wheel rim (ininches).

95: The tire's load index. In this example, aload index of 95 equals a maximum load of1521 lbs (690 kg).

H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximumspeed at which the tire is designed to bedriven for extended periods of time, carry-ing a permissible load for the vehicle, andwith correct inflation pressure. For exam-ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph(210 km/h).

NOTE

This information may not appear on the tirebecause it is not required by law.

M+S or M/

S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS =All Season

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"and indicates that the tire meets all federalstandards. The next two numbers or lettersare the plant code where it was manufac-tured, the next two are the tire size codeand the last four numbers represent theweek and year the tire was built. For exam-ple, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001.The numbers in between are marketingcodes used at the manufacturer's discre-tion. This information helps a tire manufac-turer identify a tire for safety recall purpo-ses.

Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:Indicates the number of plies indicates orthe number of layers of rubber-coated fab-ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man-ufacturers also must indicate the ply mate-rials in the tire and the sidewall, whichinclude steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Maximum Load: Indicates the maximumload in pounds and kilograms that can becarried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tireinformation placard located on the B-Pillaror the driver's door for the correct tire pres-sure for your vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

07

178

Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: See page 181 for more informa-tion.

Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure: The greatest amount of air pressurethat should ever be put in the tire. This limitis set by the tire manufacturer.

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-ings, notes or warnings such as standard load,radial tubeless, etc.

07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

07

179

Terminology

• Tire information placard: A placardshowing the OE (Original Equipment) tiresizes, recommended inflation pressure,and the maximum weight the vehicle cancarry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-ber on the sidewall of each tire providinginformation about the tire brand and man-ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-ufacturer.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of theamount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-ric tires designed to carry a maximum loadat 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].Increasing the inflation pressure beyondthis pressure will not increase the tires loadcarrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metrictires designed to carry a heavier maximumload at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metrictires]. Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will not increase thetires load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-sure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standardunit of air pressure.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the sideof the vehicle behind the front door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire nextto the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between thebead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-eter of the tire that contacts the road whenmounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire ora tire and tube assembly upon which thetire beads are seated.

• Maximum load rating: a figure indicatingthe maximum load in pounds and kilo-grams that can be carried by the tire. Thisrating is established by the tire manufac-turer.

• Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure: the greatest amount of air pressurethat should ever be put in the tire. This limitis set by the tire manufacturer.

• Recommended tire inflation pressure:inflation pressure, established by Volvo,which is based on the type of tires that aremounted on a vehicle at the factory. Thisinflation pressure is affected by the numberof occupants in the car, the amount ofcargo, and the speed at which the vehiclewill be driven for a prolonged period. Thisinformation can be found on the tire infla-tion placard(s) located on the driver's side

B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in thischapter.

• Cold tires: The tires are considered to becold when they have the same temperatureas the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-perature is normally reached after the carhas been parked for at least 3 hours.

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-mum return of vehicle design performance.

07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

07

180

Loading the vehicle

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determining yourvehicle's weight ratings, with or without atrailer, from the vehicle's Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-tion placard:

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tankof fuel and all standard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or optional equip-ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, includingcargo and optional equipment. When towing,trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargoweight.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can becarried by a single axle (front or rear). Thesenumbers are shown on the Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-gers.

NOTE

• The location of the various labels in yourvehicle can be found on page 262.

• A table listing important weight limits foryour vehicle can be found on page265.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

1. Locate the statement "the combinedweight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-cle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5×150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

WARNING

• Exceeding the permissible axle weight,gross vehicle weight, or any otherweight rating limits can cause tire over-heating resulting in permanent defor-mation or catastrophic failure.

• Do not use replacement tires with lowerload carrying capacities than the tiresthat were original equipment on thevehicle because this will lower the vehi-cle's GVW rating. Replacement tireswith a higher limit than the originals donot increase the vehicle's GVW ratinglimitations.

07 Wheels and tires

Uniform tire quality gradings

07

181

Uniform tire quality gradings

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and many depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variation in drivinghabits, maintenance practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test sur-

faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance. The trac-tion grade assigned to this tire is based onbraking (straight-ahead) traction tests and isnot a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on braking (straight-ahead) tractiontests and is not a measure of cornering(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are AA (the highest),A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a minimum level of performance thatall passenger vehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and tire failure.

07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

07

182

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo withthe following restrictions:

• Snow chains should be installed on frontwheels only. Use only Volvo approvedsnow chains.

• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tiresand wheels are installed and are of a sizedifferent than the original tires and wheels,chains in some cases CANNOT be used.Sufficient clearances between chains andbrakes, suspension and body componentsmust be maintained.

• Some strap-on type chains will interferewith brake components and thereforeCANNOT be used.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snowchain information.

CAUTION

• Check local regulations regarding theuse of snow chains before installing.

• Always follow the chain manufacturer'sinstallation instructions carefully. Installchains as tightly as possible andretighten periodically.

• Never exceed the chain manufacturer'sspecified maximum speed limit. (Underno circumstances should you exceed31 mph (50 km/h).

• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turnswhen driving with snow chains.

• The handling of the vehicle can beadversely affected when driving withchains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as wellas locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires

Tires for winter use:

• Owners who live in or regularly commutethrough areas with sustained periods ofsnow or icy driving conditions are stronglyadvised to fit suitable winter tires to helpretain the highest degree of traction.

• It is important to install winter tires on allfour wheels to help retain traction duringcornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce traction to anunsafe level or adversely affect handling.

• Do not mix tires of different design as thiscould also negatively affect overall tire roadgrip.

• Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roadsin warm weather. They should be removedwhen the winter driving season has ended.

• Studded tires should be run-in300–600 miles (500–1000 km) duringwhich the car should be driven as smoothlyas possible to give the studs the opportu-nity to seat properly in the tires. The tiresshould have the same rotational directionthroughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-tions restricting the use of studded wintertires before installing such tires.

07 Wheels and tires

Temporary spare

07

183

Temporary spare

The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem-porary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placardon the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) shouldbe maintained irrespective of which position onthe car the temporary spare tire is used.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new onecan be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-porary replacement for a punctured tire. Itmust be replaced as soon as possible by astandard tire. Road holding and handlingmay be affected with the "TemporarySpare" in use. Do not exceed a speed of50 mph (80 km/h) with the "TemporarySpare" in use.

CAUTION

The car must not be driven with wheels ofdifferent dimensions or with a spare tireother than the one that came with the car.The use of different size wheels can seri-ously damage your car's transmission.

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

07 Wheels and tires

Wheel nuts

07

184

Wheel nuts

G020324

Low nut.

High nut.

There are two different types of wheel nut,depending on whether the wheels are steel oraluminum.

Steel rims – low nut

Steel rims are normally secured using the lowtype of nut, although steel rims may also usethe high type.

WARNING

Never use the short type of nut for alumi-nium wheels. This could cause the wheel tocome loose.

Aluminum wheels – high nut

Only the high type of nut can be used for alu-minum wheels. This is considerably differentfrom other types of nut because it has a rotat-ing conical thrust washer.

NOTE

This nut can also be used on steel wheels.

Lockable wheel nut

If steel wheels with lockable wheel nuts areused in combination with wheel covers, thelockable wheel nut must be fitted to the studnearest the air valve. The wheel cover cannototherwise be installed on the wheel.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

07

��

185

Changing a wheel

G020331

The spare tire, jack, and crank are locatedunder the carpet on the floor of the cargo area.

To change a tire:


2. Put the gear selector in Park (P) or reverseon models with a manual transmission.

3. Block the wheels that are on the groundwith wooden blocks or large stones.

4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.

G020332

5. With the car still on the ground, use the lugwrench to loosen the wheel nuts 1/2–1 turnby exerting downward pressure. Turn thenuts counterclockwise to loosen.

6. There are two jack attachment points oneach side of the car. Position the jack cor-rectly in the attachment (see the illustration)and crank while simultaneously guiding thebase of the jack to the ground. The base ofthe jack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising the car,check that the jack is still correctly posi-tioned in the attachment.

Jack attachment points

7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to bechanged is lifted off the ground.

8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely andcarefully remove the wheel so as not todamage the threads on the studs.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

07

186

WARNING

• The jack must correctly engage the jackattachment.

• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-slippery surface.

• Never allow any part of your body to beextended under a car supported by ajack.

• Use the jack intended for the car whenchanging a tire. For any other job, usestands to support the car.

• Apply the parking brake and put thegear selector in the Park (P) position orreverse on models with a manual trans-mission.

• Block the wheels standing on theground, use rigid wooden blocks orlarge stones.

• The jack should be kept well-greasedand clean, and should not be damaged.

• No objects should be placed betweenthe base of jack and the ground, orbetween the jack and the attachmentbar on the vehicle.

Installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheeland hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-wise until all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-nately tighten the bolts crosswise to81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).

Returning the jack to its storage space

The jack (certain models) and tools should bereturned to their correct storage places afteruse.

• On vehicles equipped with a jack andspare wheel, the jack should be crankeddown and returned to its storage positionafter use.

• On vehicles equipped with the tire sealingsystem, the jack should be cranked downas far as possible and returned to its stor-age position in the foam block.

WARNING

The jack and any tools should always bereturned to their proper storage compart-ments after use to help keep them securelyin place in the event of sudden braking, etc.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

��


Introduction

G020112

Certain models are equipped with a tire sealingsystem* that enables you to temporarily seal ahole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, acontainer for the sealing compound, wiring toconnect the system to the vehicle’s electricalsystem via one of the 12-volt sockets, and ahose used to connect the system to the tire’sinflation valve.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the fronttunnel console and on the rear side of the tun-nel console, in the rear seat.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under thefloor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.2. Remove the screw holding the tire sealing

system's retaining bracket.3. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

• The tire sealing system is only intendedto seal holes on the tire’s tread area, notthe sidewall.

• Tires with large holes or tears cannot berepaired with the tire sealing system.

• After use, stow the tire sealing systemproperly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

• After using the tire sealing system, thevehicle should not be driven farther thanapproximately 120 miles (200 km).

• Have the tire inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician assoon as possible to determine if it canbe permanently repaired or must bereplaced.

• The vehicle should not be driven fasterthan 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tirethat has been temporarily repaired withthe tire sealing system.

• After using the tire sealing system, drivecarefully and avoid abrupt steeringmaneuvers and sudden stops.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

188

Stowing the tire sealing system

G020546

1. Return the tire sealing system to its storageposition.

2. Put the retaining bracket in its proper posi-tion.

3. Tighten the screw that holds the bracket inplace.

Be sure the bracket is correctly installed andthe screw tightened to help keep the tire seal-ing system from rattling.

Tire sealing system–overview

G020400

Speed limit sticker

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mindwhen using the tire sealing system:

• The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 inthe illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanoland natural rubber-latex. These sub-stances are harmful if swallowed.

• The contents of this bottle may causeallergic skin reactions or otherwise bepotentially harmful to the skin, the cen-tral nervous system, and the eyes.

Precautions:

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Do not ingest the contents.

• Avoid prolonged or repeated contactwith the skin.

• Hands should be washed thoroughlyafter handling.

First aid:

• Skin: Wash affected areas of skin withsoap and water. Get medical attentionif symptoms occur.

• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least15 minutes, occasionally lifting the

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

��

189

upper and lower eyelids. Get medicalattention if symptoms occur.

• Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.If irritation persists, get medical atten-tion.

Tire sealing system–temporarilyrepairing a flat tire

G019723

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in twostages:

• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumpingsealing compound into the tire. The car isthen driven a short distance to distributethe sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,etc.) from the tire before using the sealingsystem.

• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure ischecked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

• Never leave the tire sealing systemunattended when it is operating.

• Keep the tire sealing system away fromchildren.

• Be sure the vehicle is parked safely offthe road and away from moving traffic.

• Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix itto the steering wheel hub where it will beclearly visible to the driver.

3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal-ing system.

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound maycause skin irritation. If contact occurs, washthe affected area immediately with soap andwater.

5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottleholder and unscrew the cap on the bottleof sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. Thisoccurs automatically when the bottle isscrewed into the holder.

6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keepit securely in place and help prevent sealingcompound leakage. Once in place, the bot-tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

190

7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-tem’s hose connector onto the valve astightly as possible by hand.

8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

9. Start the vehicle’s engine.

10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressorby pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

• Never stand next to the tire being inflatedwhen the compressor is in operation.

• If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,switch off the compressor immediately.

• If there is visible damage to the sidewallor the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.The vehicle should not be driven if thisoccurs. Contact a towing service orVolvo On Call Roadside Assistance ifapplicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarilyshow an increase in pressure to approxi-mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-pound is being pumped into the tire. Thepressure should return to a normal levelafter approximately 30 seconds.

11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire tobetween 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switchoff the compressor briefly to get a clearreading from the pressure gauge. Thecompressor should not be used for morethan 10 minutes at a time to avoid over-heating.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used formore than 10 minutes at a time to avoidoverheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,turn off the compressor. In this case, thehole is too large to be sealed and the vehicleshould not be driven.

12. Switch off the compressor and disconnectthe electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speedof 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-ing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS), theuse of the sealing compound may lead toincorrect tire pressure readings or in rarecases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.Use the tire sealing system to check andadjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

• Safely stow the tire sealing system in aconvenient place as it will soon be usedagain to check the tire’s inflation pres-sure.

• The empty bottle of sealing compoundcannot be removed from the bottleholder. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician to have thebottle removed and properly disposedof.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

��

191

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steeringbehavior, or noises should occur while driv-ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in asafe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,cracks, or other visible damage, andrecheck its inflation pressure. If the pressureis below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continuedriving. Have the vehicle towed to a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-bed in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for thecorrect inflation pressure. If the tire needsto be inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor. If necessary, release air fromthe tire by turning the air release knobcounterclockwise.

CAUTION


WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1hour, check the inflation pressure in thedamaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must bereplaced if:

• the tire sealing system has been used torepair a tire

• the container’s expiration date has passed(see the date on decal).

NOTE

• After use, the sealing compound bottle,the hose, and certain other systemcomponents must be replaced. Pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer for replace-ment parts.

• If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-ration date has passed, please take it toa Volvo retailer or a recycling stationthat can properly dispose of harmfulsubstances.

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflatethe tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the hose connectoronto the valve as tightly as possible byhand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

• The vehicle’s engine should be runningwhen the tire sealing system is used toavoid battery drain. Therefore, be surethe vehicle is parked in a well ventilatedplace, or outdoors, before using the sys-tem.

• Children should never be left unattendedin the vehicle when the engine is running.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

192

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on thegauge. Switch off the compressor briefly toget a clear reading from the pressuregauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor-rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs tobe inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor (press the on/off switch toposition I). If necessary, release air from thetire by turning the air release knob coun-terclockwise.

CAUTION


9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/offswitch to position 0) when the correct infla-tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the12-volt socket.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

07

��

193

Introduction

The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen-sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmitinflation pressure data to a receiver located inthe vehicle.

NOTE

USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMSwill light up the tire pressure warning light (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrumentpanel and will display one of the following mes-sages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS.

CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE

PRESSURE.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressurewarning light will flash for approximately1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYSTSERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has not reachedthe level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale . When the systemdetects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists. When the mal-function indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

07

194

NOTE

• TPMS indicates low tire pressure butdoes not replace normal tire mainte-nance. For information on correct tirepressure, please refer to the tablesbeginning on page 175, or consult yourVolvo retailer.

• The tire pressure warning light will notidentify which tire is underinflated. Besure to check all four tires.

• A certain amount of air seepage fromthe tires occurs naturally and tire pres-sure fluctuates with seasonal changesin temperature. Always check tire pres-sure regularly.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message hasbeen displayed, and the tire pressure warninglight has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check theinflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure(consult the tire pressure placard or thetables, see page 175 ).

3. In certain cases, it may be necessary todrive the vehicle for several minutes at aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This

will erase the warning text and the warninglight will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tirefailure, resulting in a loss of control of thevehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing orreplacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle:

• Only the factory-mounted wheels areequipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a temporaryspare tire, this tire does not have a TPMSsensor.

• If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST

SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayedeach time the vehicle is driven above25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

• Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,the warning message should not reappear.If the message is still displayed, drive thevehicle for several minutes at a speed of20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase themessage.

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors befitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.

Volvo does not recommend moving sen-sors back and forth between sets ofwheels.

NOTE

• If you change to tires with a differentrecommended inflation pressure, theTPMS system must be recalibrated tothese tires. This must be done by anauthorized Volvo retailer or workshop.

• If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-sor is moved to another wheel, the sen-sor's seal, nut, and valve core should bereplaced.

• When installing TPMS sensors, thevehicle must be parked for at least15 minutes with the ignition off. If thevehicle is driven within 15 minutes, aTPMS error message will be displayed.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, pressthe pump's mouthpiece straight onto thevalve to help avoid bending or otherwisedamaging the valve.

07 Wheels and tires

07

195

G020920

196

Washing and cleaning the car............................................................... 198Paint touch up....................................................................................... 202

08CAR CARE

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

08


Washing the car

The following points should be kept in mindwhen washing and cleaning the car:

• The car should be washed at regular inter-vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spotsadhere to the paint and may cause dam-age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic-ularly important to wash the car frequentlyin the wintertime when salt has been usedon the roads.

• Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.Doing so may cause detergents and waxto dry out and become abrasive. To avoidscratching, use lukewarm water to softenthe dirt before you wash with a softsponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

• Bird droppings: Remove from paintworkas soon as possible. Otherwise the finishmay be permanently damaged.

• A detergent can be used to facilitate thesoftening of dirt and oil.

• Dry the car with a clean chamois andremember to clean the drain holes in thedoors and rocker panels.

• Tar spots can be removed with tar removerafter the car has been washed.

• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapywater can be used to clean the wiperblades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-shield and wiper blades improves visibility

considerably and also helps prolong theservice life of the wiper blades.

• Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheelhousings, fenders, etc).

• In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-quent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember to removedirt from the drain holes in the doors andsills.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaningproducts, available at your Volvo retailer, forcleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamentalcomponents such as chromed strips on theexterior of your vehicle. The instructions forusing these products should be followed care-fully. Solvents or stain removers should not beused.

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-ber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

CAUTION

• During high pressure washing, thespray mouthpiece must never be closerto the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do notspray into the locks.

• Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights canreduce lighting capacity considerably.Clean the headlights regularly, forexample when refueling.

Special moonroof cautions:

• Always close the moonroof* and sunshade before washing your vehicle.

• Never use wax on the rubber sealsaround the moonroof.

• Never use abrasive cleaning agents onthe moonroof.

•

08 Car care


08

��

199

Automatic washing – simple and quick

We do NOT recommend washing your car in anautomatic wash during the first six months(because the paint will not have hardened suf-ficiently).

An automatic wash is a simple and quick wayto clean your car, but it is worth rememberingthat it may not be as thorough as when youyourself go over the car with sponge and water.Keeping the underbody clean is most impor-tant, especially in the winter. Some automaticwashers do not have facilities for washing theunderbody.

CAUTION

• Before driving into an automatic carwash, turn off the optional rain sensor toavoid damaging the windshield wipers.

• Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil-iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that anyantenna(s) are retracted or removed.Otherwise there is risk of the machinedislodging them

• Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated wheels using the same deter-gents used for the body of the vehicle.Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents canpermanently stain chrome-platedwheels.

WARNING

• When the car is driven immediately afterbeing washed, apply the brakes severaltimes in order to remove any moisturefrom the brake linings.

• Engine cleaning agents should not beused when the engine is warm. Thisconstitutes a fire risk.

Exterior lighting

Condensation may form temporarily on theinside of the lenses of exterior lights such asheadlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-mal and the lights are designed to withstandmoisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-pate after the lights have been on for a shorttime.

Polishing and Waxing

• Normally, polishing is not required duringthe first year after delivery, however, wax-ing may be beneficial.

• Before applying polish or wax the vehiclemust be washed and dried. Tar spots canbe removed with kerosene or tar remover.Difficult spots may require a fine rubbingcompound.

• After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

• Several commercially available productscontain both polish and wax.

• Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-ishing a dull surface.

• A wide range of polymer-based waxes canbe purchased today. These waxes are easyto use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss finish that protects the bodyworkagainst oxidation, road dirt and fading.

• Do not polish or wax your vehicle in directsunlight (the surface of the vehicle shouldnot be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-life or durable paint protection coatings,some of which may claim to prevent pitting,fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings havenot been tested by Volvo for compatibilitywith your vehicle's clear coat. Some of themmay cause the clear coat to soften, crack,or cloud. Damage caused by application ofpaint protection coatings may not be cov-ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

08 Car care


08

200

Upholstery care

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. Formore difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabricstain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Interior plastic components

Cleaning interior plastic components shouldbe done with a cleaning agent speciallydesigned for this purpose. Consult your Volvoretailer.

Alcantera™ suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with asoft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufacturedwith a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,sunlight, grease and dirt can break down theprotection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, andfading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasyleather care kit formulated to clean and beau-tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew theprotective qualities of its finish. The cleanerremoves dirt and oil buildup. The light creamprotectant restores a barrier against soil andsunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener thatshould be applied after the cleaner and pro-tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, andreduces friction between leather and other fin-ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting andconditioning your vehicle's leather two to fourtimes a year. Ask your Volvo retailer aboutLeather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp spongeand squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving thesponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with thesponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or atowel, and allow the leather to dry com-pletely.

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream ona cloth and apply a thin coating of creamto the upholstery with light circular move-ments.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining andprotect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

CAUTION

• Under no circumstances should gaso-line, naphtha or similar cleaning agentsbe used on the plastic or the leathersince these can cause damage.

• Take extra care when removing stainssuch as ink or lipstick since the coloringcan spread.

• Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-vent can damage the seat padding.

• Start from the outside of the stain andwork toward the center.

• Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in apocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothingmay damage the textile upholstery.

• Clothing that is not colorfast, such asnew jeans or suede garments, may stainthe upholstery.

08 Car care


08

201

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mildsoap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushedclean regularly, especially during winter whenthey should be taken out for drying. Spots ontextile mats can be removed with a mild deter-gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec-ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.Consult your Volvo retailer.

08 Car care

Paint touch up

08

202

Touching up minor paint damage

Paint damage requires immediate attention toavoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finishregularly - when washing the vehicle forinstance. Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment andskill. Contact a trained and authorized Volvoservice technician for any extensive damage.Minor scratches can be repaired by usingVolvo touch-up paint.

Color codeG031024

When ordering touch-up paint from your Volvoretailer, make sure you have the right color.Use the paint code indicated on the modelplate (1 in the illustration).

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

• Primer – can

• Paint – touch-up pen

• Brush

• Masking tape

G020345

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should beclean and dry. The surface temperatureshould be above 60° F (15° C).

If the stone chip has not penetrated downto the metal and an undamaged layer ofpaint remains, the touch-up paint can beapplied as soon as the spot has beencleaned.

Deep scratches

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-aged surface. Pull the tape off so that anyloose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it witha small brush. When the primer surface isdry, the paint can be applied using a brush.Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thinpaint coats and let dry after each applica-tion.

3. If there is a longer scratch, you may wantto protect surrounding paint by masking itoff.

08 Car care

08

203

G020922

204

Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 206Maintaining your car............................................................................. 208Hood..................................................................................................... 210Engine compartment............................................................................. 211Engine oil............................................................................................... 212Fluids..................................................................................................... 214Wiper blades......................................................................................... 216Battery................................................................................................... 217Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 219Fuses..................................................................................................... 227

09MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING


Volvo maintenance 09

206

General

Volvo advises you to follow the maintenanceprogram outlined in the Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet. This mainte-nance program contains inspections and serv-ices necessary for the proper function of yourvehicle. The maintenance services containseveral checks that require special tools andtraining, and therefore must be performed by aqualified technician. To keep your Volvo in topcondition, specify time-tested and provenGenuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehiclemanufacturers to furnish written instructions tothe ultimate purchaser to assure the properservicing and function of the components thatcontrol emissions. These services, which arelisted in the "Warranty and Service RecordsInformation" booklet, are not covered by thewarranty. You will be required to pay for laborand material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspectionsbefore it was delivered to you, in accordancewith Volvo specifications. The maintenanceprocedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-ice Records Information booklet, many ofwhich will positively affect your vehicle's emis-sions, should be performed as indicated. It isrecommended that receipts for vehicle emis-sion maintenance be retained in case ques-tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-tion and maintenance should also be per-formed anytime a malfunction is observed orsuspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-dian regulations, the following list of warrantiesis provided.

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty

• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

• Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

• Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-tems Limited Warranty

• Emission Design and Defect Warranty

• Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other warran-ties are provided as required by state/provin-cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet fordetailed information concerning each of thewarranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimizeemissions

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-cle running well. Your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet provides a com-prehensive periodic maintenance schedule upto 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main-tenance. The schedule includes componentsthat affect vehicle emissions. This pagedescribes some of the emission-related com-ponents.

Vehicle Event Data (Black Box)

Your vehicle's driving and safety systemsemploy computers that monitor, and sharewith each other, information about your vehi-cle's operation. One or more of these comput-ers may store what they monitor, either duringnormal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-crash event. Stored information may be readand used by:

• Volvo Car Corporation

• service and repair facilities


Volvo maintenance 09

207

• law enforcement or government agencies

• others who may assert a legal right toknow, or who obtain your consent to knowsuch information.


Maintaining your car 09

208

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-vals are described in your vehicle's Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried outbetween the normally scheduled maintenanceservices.

Each time the car is refueled:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,headlights, and taillights.

Monthly:

• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspectthe tires for wear.

• Check that engine coolant and other fluidlevels are between the indicated "min" and"max" markings.

• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glasscleaner and soft paper towels.

• Wipe driver information displays with a softcloth.

• Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-minal connector, or a battery near the endof its useful service life. Consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician foradditional information.

As needed:

• Wash the car, including the undercarriage,to reduce wear that can be caused by abuildup of dirt, and corrosion that can becaused by salt residues.

• Clean leaves and twigs from air intakevents at the base of the windshield, andfrom other places where they may collect.

NOTE

Complete service information for qualifiedtechnicians is available online for purchaseor subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, thetwo jack attachments points should be used.They are specially reinforced to bear the weightof the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placedunder the front of the engine support frame.Take care not to damage the splash guardunder the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi-tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it.Always use axle stands or similar structures.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, thefront and rear lift arm pads should be centeredunder the reinforced lift plates on the inboardedge of the sill rail (see illustration).

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerizedengine management system. It stores diagnos-tic information about your vehicle's emissioncontrols. It can light the Check Engine light(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A"fault" is a component or system that is notperforming within an expected range. A faultmay be permanent or temporary. OBD II willstore a message about any fault.


Maintaining your car 09

209

How Do States Use OBD II for Emission

Inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to avehicle's OBD II system. The inspector canthen read "faults." In some states, this type ofinspection has replaced the tailpipe emissiontest.

How Can My Vehicle Fail OBD II Emission

Inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-tion for any of the following reasons.

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, yourvehicle may fail inspection.

• If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,but went out without any action on yourpart, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.Your vehicle may pass or fail, dependingon the inspection practices in your area.

• If you had recent service that required dis-connecting the battery, OBD II diagnosticinformation may be incomplete and "notready" for inspection. A vehicle that is notready may fail inspection.

How Can I Prepare for My Next OBD II

Emission Inspection?

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – orwas lit but went out without service, have

your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

• If you recently had service for a lit CheckEngine light, or if you had service thatrequired disconnecting the battery, aperiod of driving is necessary to bring theOBD II system to "ready" for inspection. Ahalf-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-way driving is typically needed to allowOBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvoretailer can provide you with more infor-mation on planning a trip.

• Maintain your vehicle in accordance withyour vehicle's maintenance schedule.


Hood 09

210

Opening the hood

G031032

To open the hood:

1. Pull the lever located under the left side ofthe dash to release the hood lock.

2. Lift the hood slightly.

3. Press up the release control located underthe front edge of the hood (at the center)up to the right, and lift the hood.

WARNING

Check that the hood locks engage properlywhen closed.


Engine compartment 09

211

G026456

Cooling system expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir (concealedbehind the headlight)

Dipstick – engine oil

Radiator

Cooling fan

Washer fluid reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Air cleaner

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue tooperate (for up to 6 minutes) after the enginehas been switched off.


Engine oil 09

212

Changing engine oil and oil filter

See page 269 for oil specifications. Refer tothe Warranty and Service Records Informationbooklet for information on the oil change inter-vals.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

NOTE

• Volvo does not recommend the use ofoil additives.

• Synthetic oil is not used when the oil ischanged at the normal maintenanceintervals except at owner request and atadditional charge. Please consult atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Checking and adding oil

The oil level should be checked every time thevehicle is refueled. This is especially importantduring the period up to the first scheduledmaintenance service

• The car should be parked on a level surfacewhen the oil is checked.

• If the engine is warm, wait for at least10–15 minutes after the engine has beenswitched off before checking the oil.

G020338

Location of dipstick and oil filler cap

Checking the oil

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and checkthe oil level.

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close tothe MIN mark, add approximately1 US quart (1 liter) of oil.

4. Run the engine until it reaches normaloperating temperature.

5. Switch off the engine and wait for at least10–15 minutes and recheck the oil level. Ifnecessary, add oil until the level is near theMAX mark.

G020336

CAUTION

• Not checking the oil level regularly canresult in serious engine damage if the oillevel becomes too low.

• Oil that is lower than the specified qual-ity can damage the engine.

• Always add oil of the same type andviscosity as already used.

• Never fill oil above the MAX mark. Thiscould cause an increase in oil consump-tion.


Engine oil 09

213

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come intocontact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces

NOTE

Volvo uses different systems to indicate alow oil level or pressure. Some models havean oil pressure sensor, in which case awarning symbol (see page 57) is used toindicate low oil pressure. Other models havean oil level sensor, in which case the driveris alerted by the warning symbol in the cen-ter of the instrument panel and a text in theinformation display. Some models use bothsystems. Contact an authorized Volvoretailer for more information.


Fluids 09

214

Washer fluid

G026425

Washer fluid reservoir

The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment and holds approximately6.8 US qts (6.5 liters). During cold weather, thereservoir should be filled with windshieldwasher solvent containing antifreeze.

Coolant

G020334

Coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to bechanged. If the system must be drained, con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

CAUTION

• If necessary, top up the cooling systemwith Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreezeonly (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-freeze).

• Different types of antifreeze/coolantmay not be mixed.

• If the cooling system is drained, itshould be flushed with clean water orpremixed anti-freeze before it is refilledwith the correct mixture of water/anti-freeze.

• The cooling system must always bekept filled to the correct level, and thelevel must be between the MIN andMAX marks. If it is not kept filled, therecan be high local temperatures in theengine which could result in damage.Check coolant regularly!

• Do not top up with water only. Thisreduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and has alower boiling point. It can also causedamage to the cooling system if itshould freeze.

• Do not use chlorinated tap water in thevehicles cooling system.


Fluids 09

215

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap while theengine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools.

If it is necessary to top off the coolant whenthe engine is warm, unscrew the expansiontank cap slowly so that the overpressuredissipates.

Brake fluid

G020333

Brake fluid reservoir

The brake fluid should always be between theMIN and MAX marks on the side of the reser-voir. Check, without removing the cap, thatthere is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

(280 °C), P/N 9437433

Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord-ing to the intervals specified in the Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet.When driving under extremely hard conditions(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary toreplace the fluid more often. Consult yourVolvo retailer. Always entrust brake fluidchanging to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician.

WARNING

• If the fluid level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a brake-relatedmessage is shown in the informationdisplay: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the cartowed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brakesystem inspected.

• Dot 4+ should never be mixed with anyother type of brake fluid.

Power steering fluid

The fluid level is checked at each service inter-val.

Fluid type: Volvo power steering fluid or equiv-alent.

Replace: No fluid change required.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the powersteering system or if the vehicle has no elec-trical current and must be towed, it is stillpossible to steer the vehicle. However, keepin mind that greater effort will be required toturn the steering wheel.


Wiper blades 09

216

Replacing windshield wiper blades

G020330

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Press the button on the wiper blade attach-ment and pull straight out (1), parallel withthe wiper arm.

3. Press a new wiper blade (2) until it clicksinto place.

4. Ensure the blade is securely attached (3).

5. Fold in the wiper arm.

The wiper blades are different lengths. Theblade on the driver's side is longer than the oneon the passenger's side.

G020329

Liftgate wiper blade

G007444

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Remove the wiper blade by pulling itstraight out from the wiper arm.

3. Press the new wiper blade securely intoplace.

Fold in the wiper arm.

Keeping the windshield/liftgate window andwiper blades clean helps improve visibility andprolongs the service life of the wiper blades.See page 198 for washing instructions.


Battery 09

��

217

Battery maintenance

Driving habits and conditions, climate, thenumber of starts, etc., all affect the service lifeand function of the battery. In order for yourbattery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol-lowing in mind:

Check the fluid level in each cell in the batteryevery 24 months or every 15,0001 miles(24,000 km), whichever is sooner.

• Use a screw driver to open the caps orcover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

• If necessary, add distilled water. The levelshould never be above the indicator.

• The fluid level should be checked if thebattery has been recharged.

• After inspection, be sure the cap over eachbattery cell or the cover is securely inplace.

• Check that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and properly tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running, or when the key is in theignition. This could damage the vehicle'selectrical system.

• The battery should be disconnected fromthe vehicle when a battery charger is useddirectly on the battery.

• To help keep the battery in good condition,the vehicle should be driven for at least 15minutes a week or connected to a chargerwith an automatic charging function.

• If the battery is fully discharged a numberof times, this may shorten its service life.Keeping the battery fully charged helpsprolong its service life.

• The service life of a battery is affected byfactors such as driving conditions and cli-mate. Extreme cold may also furtherdecrease the battery’s starting capacity.

• Because the battery’s starting capacitydecreases with time, it may be necessaryto recharge it if the vehicle is not driven foran extended period of time or if the vehicleis usually only driven short distances.

•

WARNING



Battery symbols

Wear protection goggles

See owner's manual fordetails

Keep away from children

Corrosive

1 More frequently in warm climates.


Battery 09

218

No smoking, no open flames,no sparks

Explosion

Battery replacement

Removing the battery

1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key.

2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching offthe ignition before disconnecting the bat-tery so that all information in the vehicle'selectrical system can be stored in the con-trol modules.

3. Remove the cover over the battery.

4. Disconnect the battery negative (ground)cable.

5. Disconnect the positive cable.

6. Remove the front side of the battery boxwith a screwdriver.

7. Release the clamp holding the battery.

8. Lift out the battery.

Installing a new battery

1. Put the battery in place in the engine com-partment.

2. Install the battery's retaining clamp.

3. Reinstall the front side of the battery box.

4. Connect the positive cable.

5. Connect the ground cable.

6. Reinstall the cover over the battery.

NOTE

Used batteries should be properly disposedof at a recycling station or similar facility, ortaken to your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.


Replacing bulbs 09

��

219

Introduction

Before replacing bulbs in your vehicle, pleasekeep the following points in mind:

NOTE

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-gers. Grease and oils from your fingersvaporize in the heat and will leave a depositon the reflector, which will damage it.

The optional Dual Xenon headlight bulbscontain trace amounts of mercury. Thesebulbs should always be disposed of by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian.

Certain bulbs should only be replaced by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian:

• Courtesylighting

• Reading lights

• Glove compartment lights

• Turn signals and courtesy lights in theside door mirrors

• High-mounted brake lights

• Dual Xenon headlights, Brake lights

Removing the headlight housing

WARNING

• The engine should not be running whenchanging bulbs.

• When changing in the headlight hous-ing, if the engine has been running justprior to replacing bulbs, please beaware that components in the enginecompartment will be hot.

G007334

The entire headlight housing must be lifted outwhen replacing the high/low beam, parking

light, turn signal, and side marker bulbs. To liftout the housing:

1. Remove the key from the ignition and turnthe headlight switch to position .

2. Open the hood.

3. Pull up the headlight housing's retainingpin.

4. Pull out the headlight housing.

4

G007612

5. Disconnect the wiring connector by press-ing down the clip with your thumb while atthe same time pulling the connector withyour other hand.


Replacing bulbs 09


6. Lift out the headlight housing and place iton a soft surface to avoid scratching thelens.

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull onthe connector itself and not on the wiring.

After the defective bulb has been replaced,reinsert the housing in the reverse order. Checkthat the retaining pin is correctly inserted.

WARNING

Dual Xenon headlights* – due to the highvoltage used by these headlights, thesebulbs should only be replaced by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

Low beam bulb

G020255

Cover with retaining clamps

1. Open the hood and remove the headlighthousing (see page 219 for instructions).

2. Release the retaining clamps on the cover.

3. Release the bulb's retaining spring holdingthe bulb in place by pressing it first to theleft and then moving it outward and down-ward.

4. Pull out the bulb.

G007339

Low beam bulb

Installing a new bulb

1. Insert the new bulb. It can only be installedin one position.

2. Press the retaining spring inward andupward and slightly to the right until itsnaps into place.

3. Press the wiring connector onto the bulb.

4. Put the plastic cover in place.

5. Press the retaining clamps back into place.

6. Reinstall the headlight housing (seepage 219).


Replacing bulbs 09

��


High beam bulb

G007338

Halogen high beam bulb

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the headlight housing (seepage 219).

NOTE

The halogen high beam bulb has a differentsocket on vehicles equipped with theoptional Dual Xenon headlights. On thesemodels, pull the bulb straight out.

WARNING

Dual Xenon headlights* – due to the highvoltage used by these headlights, the DualXenon bulbs should only be replaced by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian.

3. Driver's side headlight: Turn the bulbholder counterclockwise.

Passenger's side headlight: Turn the bulbholder clockwise.

4. Pull out the bulb holder and replace thebulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only beinstalled in one position.

6. Reinstall the headlight housing (seepage 219).

Parking light bulb

G007392

1. Pull out the bulb holder with a pair of pliers.The bulb holder should not be pulled outby the wire.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Press the bulb holder back into place. Itcan only be installed in one position.


Replacing bulbs 09


Turn signal

G007393

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise andremove it.

2. Remove the bulb from the holder by press-ing it in and twisting it counterclockwise.

3. Insert a new bulb and reinstall the bulbholder in the headlight housing.

Side marker light

G007394

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,pull it out, and replace the bulb.

2. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only beinstalled in one position.

Front fog lights*

G020348

1. Switch off all lights and turn the key toposition 0.

2. Remove the panel around the fog lighthousing.

3. Unscrew both torx screws in the fog lighthousing and remove it.

4. Disconnect the connector from the bulb.

5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull itout.

6. Install the new bulb in its seat and turn itclockwise.

7. Reconnect the connector to the bulb.


Replacing bulbs 09

��

223

8. Secure the fog light housing with thescrews and press the panel back intoplace.

Removing the taillight bulb holder

G007402

All bulbs in the taillight cluster can be replacedfrom the cargo area. To access the bulb hold-ers:


2. Remove the covers (A or B) in the left/rightpanels to access the bulb holders.

3. Disconnect the wiring connector from theaffected bulb holder.

4. Press the catches together and pull out thebulb holder.

5. Replace the defective bulb.

6. Press the wiring connector back into posi-tion.

7. Press the bulb holder into place and rein-stall the cover.

Location of taillight bulbs

G007395

Location of taillight bulbs

Brake light (LED)1

Taillight/parking light/fog light (driver’sside only)

Taillight/parking light

Turn signal

Back-up light

Taillight/parking light

NOTE

If the message indicating a burned out bulbremains in the information display after thebulb has been replaced, consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

High-level brake light

These bulbs should only be replaced by atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

1 The wiring to the LED brake lights is permanently connected to the bulb holder. It should not be removed.


Replacing bulbs 09

224

License plate lighting

G007634


2. Remove the screws with a screw driver.

3. Detach the lens (bulb housing) carefully.


5. Reinstall the entire bulb housing and screwit into place.

Rear grids

G007447

The grids are held in place by clips and can bepressed into position. They can only be instal-led one way.

Footwell lighting

G020795

The footwell lighting is located under the dash-board on the driver's and passenger's sides.To replace a bulb:

1. Insert a screwdriver under the edge of thelens. Turn the screwdriver gently to detachthe lens.

2. Remove the defective bulb.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Press the lens back into place.


Replacing bulbs 09

��

225

Cargo area lighting

G007613

1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently todetach the bulb housing.

2. Remove the defective bulb.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Press the bulb housing back into place.

Cabin lighting in the cargo area

G010326

The rear cabin lighting consists of a light on thedriver’s side of the cargo area

1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it carefully torelease the lens.

2. Remove the connector from the bulbholder.


4. Press the lens back into place.

Vanity mirror lighting

G020253

1. Insert a screwdriver under the center of thelower edge of the mirror, turn it, and care-fully pry up the lugs at the edge.

2. Move the screwdriver under the edge onthe left and right-hand sides (near the blackrubber sections) and pry carefully torelease the lower edge of the mirror.

3. Pry carefully and lift out the entire mirrorand the cover.

4. Remove the defective bulb and replace itwith a new one.

5. To reinstall the mirror, begin by pressingthe three lugs at the upper edge of the mir-ror back into place.


Replacing bulbs 09

226

6. Press the three lower lugs back into place.


Fuses 09

��

227

Replacing fuses

There are relay/fuse boxes located in theengine compartment and the passenger com-partment.

If an electrical component fails to function, thismay be due to a blown fuse. The easiest wayto see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficultto remove, special fuse removal tools arelocated on the inside of the fuse box cov-ers.

2. From the side, examine the curved metalwire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse ofthe same color and amperage (written onthe fuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electricalsystem inspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higheramperage than those stated on the follow-ing pages. Doing so could seriously damageor overload the vehicle's electrical system.


Fuses 09

228

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G007446

The fuse box in the engine compartment haspositions for 36 fuses.

• Fuses 1–18 are relays/circuit breakers andshould only be removed or replaced by anauthorized Volvo service technician.

• Fuses 19–36 may be changed at any timewhen necessary.

Several extra fuses and a fuse removal tool toassist in removing/replacing fuses can befound on the underside of the fuse box coverin the engine compartment.


Fuses 09

��

229

Fuses in the engine compartment

G020250

1. Coolant fan (radiator) 50A

2. Power steering 80A

3. Feed to passenger com-partment fuse box

60A


60A

5. Element, climate unit 80A

6. Not in use

7. ABS pump 30A

8. ABS valves 20A

9. Engine functions 30A

10. Climate system blower 40A

11. Headlight washers 20A

12. Feed to heated rear window 30A

13. Starter motor relay 30A

14. Trailer connector (acces-sory)

40A

15. Not in use

16. Feed to audio system 30A

17. Windshield wipers 30A


40A

19. Not in use

20. Horn 15A

21. Not in use

22. Not in use

23. Engine control module(ECM)/transmission controlmodule (TCM)

10A


Fuses 09


24. Not in use

25. Not in use

26. Ignition switch 15A

27. A/C compressor 10A

28. Not in use

29. Front fog lights* 15A

30. Not in use

31. Not in use

32. Fuel injectors 10A

33. Heated oxygen sensor, vac-uum pump

20A

34. Ignition coils, climate unitpressure sensor

10A

35. Engine sensor valves, A/Crelay, relay coil, PTC ele-ment oil trap, canister, massair meter

15A

36. Engine control module(ECM), throttle sensor

10A


Fuses 09

��

231

Fuse box in the passenger compartment

G020601

The fuse box in the passenger compartment islocated under the glove compartment.

To access the fuses:

1. Remove the upholstery covering the fusebox by first pressing in the center pins inthe mounting clips approximately 0.5 in(1 cm) with a small screwdriver and thenpulling the pins out.

2. Turn both retaining screws (2) counter-clockwise until they release.

3. Fold down the fuse box (3) half way. Pull ittoward the seat until it stops. Fold it downcompletely. The fuse box can be unhookedcompletely.

4. Replace the blown fuse.

5. Close the fuse box in reverse order.

6. Pull the center pins fully out of the mount-ing clips, secure the upholstery with themounting clips and press the pins into themounting clips again. The mounting clipsthen expand, holding the upholstery inposition.


Fuses 09


Fuses in the passenger compartment

G020246

- Fuse 37-42, not in use -

43. Audio system, Blue-tooth,Volvo Navigation sys-tem*

15A

44. Supplemental Restrain Sys-tem (SRS), engine controlmodule

10A

45. 12-volt socket in rear seat 15A

46. Lighting – glove compart-ment, instrument panel, andfootwells

5A

47. Interior lighting 5A

48. Rear liftgate wiper/washer 15A

49. Supplemental Restrain Sys-tem (SRS), OccupantWeight Sensor (OWS)

10A

50. Not in use

51. Fuel filter relay 10A

52. Transmission control mod-ule (TCM), ABS

5A

53. Power steering 10A

54. Park assist*, Dual Xenonheadlights*

10A

55. Not in use

56. Volvo Navigation Systemremote key module, alarmsiren control module

10A

57. On-board diagnosticsocket, brake light switch

15A

58. Right high beam, auxiliarylights relay

7.5A

59. Left high beam 7.5A


Fuses 09


60. Heated driver's seat* 15A

61. Heated passenger's seat* 15A

62. Moonroof* 20A

63. Not in use

64. Audio system, Volvo Navi-gation system*

5A

65. Audio system 5A

66. Audio system control mod-ule (ICM), climate system

10A

67. Not in use

68. Cruise control 5A

69. Climate system, rain sen-sor*, BLIS button*

5A

70. Not in use

71. Not in use

72. Not in use

73. Moonroof, front ceilinglighting, auto-dim mirror*,seat belt reminder

5A

74. Fuel pump relay 15A

75. Not in use

76. Not in use

77. Not in use

78. Not in use

79. Back-up lights 5A

80. Not in use

81. Not in use 20A

82. Power window – front pas-senger's side door

25A

83. Power window and doorlock – front driver's sidedoor

25A

84. Power passenger's seat 25A

85. Power driver's seat 25A

86. Interior lighting relay, cargoarea light, power seats

5A

G020924

234

Audio functions..................................................................................... 236Radio functions..................................................................................... 241CD player/CD changer.......................................................................... 249Audio menu........................................................................................... 253

Bluetooth® hands-free connection....................................................... 254

10AUDIO

10 Audio

Audio functions

10


Audio system controls

G026347

VOLUME dial

AM/FM – select a radio band

MODE – select a sound source

TUNING dial

SOUND button

Auxiliary connector

AUX port

USB connector*

Selecting a sound source

� Press AM/FM (2) repeatedly to togglebetween FM1, FM2, and AM.

� Press MODE (3) repeatedly to togglebetween the CD player and the optionalexternal sound source AUX, USB or theoptional Sirius satellite radio.

The currently selected sound source will beshown in the display.

AUX

The AUX (auxiliary) port, located under the cen-ter armrest, can be used to connect for exam-ple, an MP3 player.

If the player is being charged through a 12-voltsocket while it is connect to the AUX port,sound quality may be impaired.

The volume of the external sound source AUXmay be different from the volume of the internalsound sources such as the CD player or theradio. If the external sound source's volume istoo high, the quality of the sound may beimpaired.

This can be prevented by adjusting the externalsound source's input volume.

1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower theaudio volume to about one-quarter.

2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio systemby pressing the MODE button.

3. Connect the headphone output from yourmusic player to the AUX input using a cablewith a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at bothends.

4. Set your music player's headphone vol-ume to three-quarters using the player'svolume controls.

10 Audio

Audio functions

10

��


5. Press MENU on the audio system, andnavigate to AUX Volume or AUX Input

Volume.

6. Turn the volume knob to raise or lower theAUX Input Volume until you hear music ata comfortable level.

7. If there is distortion, lower your music play-er's headphone volume until the distortiongoes away.

8. Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audiovolume to a comfortable level.

Volume

Use the volume dial (1) or the buttons in thesteering wheel keypad to adjust the volumelevel. The volume level is also adjusted auto-matically according to the vehicle's speed, seepage 239 for more information on this func-tion.

Steering wheel keypad

G026424

Steering wheel keypad

The four buttons on the steering wheel keypadcan be used to control the audio system. Thesteering wheel keypad can be used to adjustvolume, shift between preset stations andchange CD tracks. Press one of the two left-hand buttons briefly to change to the next/pre-vious preset radio station, or to go to the next/previous track on a CD. Press and hold downthese buttons to search within a track on a CD.

Daytime/twilight display

In daylight the information is displayed againsta light background. In darkness it is displayedagainst a dark background.

USB/iPod connector*

An auxiliary device, such as an iPod , MP3player or a USB flash drive can be connectedto the audio system via the connector in thecenter console storage compartment. A stand-ard cable from an iPod or MP3 player can berouted under the cover to the AUX connectorin the storage compartment.

A sound source must be chosen, depending onthe device that has been connected:

1. Use MODE to select iPod or USB. The textCONNECT DEVICE will be displayed.

2. Connect the device to the connector in thecenter console storage compartment (seethe illustration).

10 Audio

Audio functions

10

238

The text LOADING will be displayed while thesystem loads the files (folder structure) on thedevice. This may take a short time.

When information about the files (the folderstructure) on the device has been loaded, theresulting list includes information on the artist,genre and song title.

To navigate in the folder structure, pressENTER and scroll up and down the foldersusing the arrow buttons (on the audio systemcontrol panel or on the steering wheel keypad).Press the right arrow button to select a folder.Press the left arrow button to go up a level inthe folder structure. Press ENTER to go downa level in the folder structure.

Tracks can be selected in two ways:

� Turn the Tuning knob (no. 4 in the illustra-tion on page 241) clockwise or counter-clockwise.

� Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav-igation control (no. 5 in the illustration onpage 241) to select the desired track. Thearrow keys on the steering wheel keypadcan also be used in the same way.

NOTE

The system supports playback of files in themost common versions of formats such asmp3, wma, and wav. However, there may beversions of these formats that the systemdoes not support.

The system also supports a number ofiPod models produced in 2005 or later.iPod Shuffle is not supported.

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it isadvisable to only store music files on the drive.It will take considerably longer for the systemto index the files on the drive if it contains any-thing other than compatible music files.

NOTE

The system supports removable media thatuses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32file system and can index up to 500 foldersand a maximum of 64,000 files. The devicemust have at least 256 Mb of memory.

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have a file indexing systemthat is not supported by the vehicle's audiosystem. In order to use an MP3 player, the sys-tem must be set to USB Removable device/Mass Storage Device.

iPod

An iPod receives current and its battery ischarged through the connecting cord. How-ever, if the iPod's battery is completelydrained, it should be recharged before theiPod is connected to the audio system.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as a sound source,the vehicle's audio system has a menustructure similar to the one in the iPod . Seethe iPod's manual for detailed information.

For further information, refer to the accessorymanual USB/iPod Music Interface.

Sound settings

Optimal sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimalsound reproduction through the use of digitalsignal processing. This calibration takes intoaccount the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous-tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., foreach combination of vehicle and audio system.There is also dynamic calibration that takesinto account the setting of the volume control,radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. Thesound settings described in this manual, suchas BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are only

10 Audio

Audio functions

10

��

239

intended to enable the user to adapt soundreproduction to his/her personal preferences.

1. Press SOUND (5). Press this buttonrepeatedly until you come to the settingthat you wish to change.

2. Turn the TUNING dial (4) to make thedesired setting.

The following settings can be made:

BASS–set the bass level

TREBLE–set the treble level

BALANCE–set the left/right sound balance

FADER–set the front/rear sound balance

CENTER–make settings for the center speaker

SURROUND–make settings for surroundsound

Surround sound

Surround sound settings are used tobalance sound levels throughout thevehicle. Surround settings for the var-ious sound sources are made sepa-

rately.

G021216

NOTE

• Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is onlyavailable on the Premium Sound sys-tem.

• When listening to FM radio stations,Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functionsbest in areas with strong reception. Ifreception is weak, selecting 2 or 3-channel stereo may provide bettersound quality.

The Dolby symbol will be appear in the displaywhen Dolby Pro Logic II is activated.

There are three alternative settings:

• Pro Logic II

• 3-channel

• Off (normal 2-channel stereo)

Activating/deactivating Surround sound

1. Press MENU followed by ENTER.

2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu andpress ENTER.

3. Select Surround FM/AM/CD/AUX andpress ENTER.

4. Select Pro logic II, 3-channel stereo orOff and press ENTER.

Equalizer Front/Rear

This function is used to fine-tune the soundlevel for different frequencies separately.

NOTE

This function is only available on certainsound systems.

To adjust the equalizer settings:



3. Select Equalizer Front/Rear and pressENTER.

The column in the display indicates the soundlevel for the current frequency.

• Adjust the level with the TUNING dial (4),or use the Up/Down arrows. Additional fre-quencies can be selected with the Right/Left arrows.

• Save the settings by pressing ENTER orexit without saving by pressing EXIT.

Automatic sound control

The audio system's volume is adjusted auto-matically according to the speed of the vehicle.

10 Audio

Audio functions

10

240

There are three settings available, which deter-mine the level of volume compensation:

• Low

• Medium1

• High

To set the automatic sound level:



3. Select AUTO. VOLUME CONTROL in themenu and press ENTER.

4. Select Low, Medium, or High and pressENTER.

1 Default setting.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

��

241

Radio function controls

G026366

AM/FM1/FM2 selection

Station preset buttons

TUNING dial for selecting radio stations

SCAN

MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–pressthe up or down arrow keys to scroll in amenu, or the keys on the left/right sides ofthe control to search for or change radiostations/CD tracks

EXIT–press to cancel a menu selection ora selected function

AUTO–search for and store the strongestradio stations in the area in which you aredriving

Searching for stations

There are two ways to manually tune a radiostation:

� Turn the TUNING dial (3) to the desired fre-quency.

� Press the left or right arrow key on themenu navigation control and hold it down.The radio scans slowly in the selecteddirection and will increase the scanningspeed after a few seconds. Release thebutton when the desired frequencyappears in the display.

The frequency can be fine-tuned by shortpresses on the left/right arrow keys.

Storing preset stations

Manually storing a station

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold the preset button underwhich the station is to be stored. The audiosystem sound will be interrupted for a fewseconds and STATION STORED willappear in the display.

NOTE

A total of 30 stations can be stored; 10 sta-tions each in AM, FM1 and FM2.

Automatically storing a station

Pressing AUTO (7) automatically searches forand stores up to ten strong AM or FM stationsin a separate memory. If more than ten stationsare found, the ten strongest ones are stored.This function is especially useful in areas inwhich you are not familiar with radio stations ortheir frequencies.

To use the AUTO function:

1. Select a waveband using the AM/FM but-ton (1).

2. Start the search by pressing AUTO untilAUTO STORING appears in the display.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

242

When the search is completed, AUTO

STORING will no longer be displayed. If thereare no stations with sufficient signal strength,NO AST FOUND is displayed.

The auto-stored stations can be selected usingthe preset buttons (2).

� Press EXIT (6) to terminate the automaticstoring function.

When the radio is in auto-store mode, AUTO isshown in the display. AUTO disappears whenyou return to normal radio mode, which can bedone by briefly pressing AM/FM (1), EXIT (6),or AUTO (7).

To return to the Auto-store mode, press theAUTO button briefly and select a stored stationby pressing one of the preset buttons (2).

Saving auto-stored stations in the preset

memory

An auto-stored station can be saved in thememory for manually preset stations.

1. Press AUTO (7) briefly.> Auto is displayed.

2. Press one of the preset buttons (2) underwhich the station is to be stored. Hold

down the button until STATION

STORED is displayed.

The radio will then exit auto-store mode andthe stored station can be selected by pressingthe preset button.

Scanning

SCAN (4) automatically searches through theselected waveband for strong AM or FM sta-tions. When the radio finds a station, that sta-tion will be played for approximately 8 sec-onds, after which scanning resumes.

Activating/deactivating SCAN

1. Select radio mode using the AM/FM but-ton (2).

2. Press SCAN to activate the function.SCAN is shown in the display.

3. Press the SCAN or EXIT button to deacti-vate the scan function and listen to theselected station.

Storing a station found with SCAN

A station can be stored as a preset while theSCAN function is activated.

� Press one of the preset buttons (2) underwhich the station is to be stored. Hold

down the button until STATION

STORED is displayed.

The SCAN function will be deactivated and thestation can be selected by pressing the presetbutton.

Radio text

Certain stations broadcast program informa-tion, which can be shown in the display.

To start this function:

1. Select FM1 or FM2 and press the MENU

button.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and pressENTER.

To deactivate this function, selectRADIOTEXT again and press ENTER.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

��

243

HD Radio reception (U.S.

models only)1

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radiobroadcast

HD radio is a brand name registered by theIbiquity digital corporation2. They are thedeveloper of a broadcasting technology calledIBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers tothe method of transmitting a digital radiobroadcast signal centered on the same fre-quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-quency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"since it is both analogue and digital. Duringhybrid operation, receivers still continue toreceive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HDradio receivers incorporate both modes ofreception, where the receiver will automaticallyswitch to the analogue signal if the digital signalcannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,the symbol will appear in the audio sys-tem display.

More information about HD radio and IBOCcan be found on Ibiquity's website,www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

• Better sound (FM sounds near CD qualityand AM as analogue FM).

• Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-ber of listening choices through “multicast-ing” (consisting of a frequency's mainchannel and any sub-channels that mayalso be available on that particular fre-quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-nels" below).

• When receiving a digital signal there is nomultipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radioand broadcasts of this type are available inmany areas of the United States. However,there are a few key differences:

• Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-nal, stations send out a bundled signal –both analogue and digital.

• An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-ital and analogue broadcasts. Dependingon the terrain and location of the vehicle(which will influence the signal strength),the receiver will determine which signal toreceive.

Limitations

• Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only channelthat can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels, they are broadcast in digitalmode only. The main FM channel will bedisplayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC(Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate thereare sub-channels available) The sub-FM

1 HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquityDigital Corp. HD Radio(TM) is only available in vehicles not equipped with the optional integrated CD changer.

2 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquityDigital Corp.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

244

channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

• Reception coverage area: Due to currentIBOC transmitter power limitations, thereception coverage area in digital mode issomewhat more limited than the station'sanalogue coverage area. Please be awarethat as with any radio broadcast technol-ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level andbuilding location can have positive or neg-ative effects on radio reception.

• Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending willoccur as the signal strength reaches a pre-set threshold in the receiver. This will benoticeable in fringe areas (areas with weakreception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference insound quality when a change from analogueto digital or digital to analogue occurs, suchas:

• Volume increase or decrease

• Equalizer settings, i.e. Bass/ Midrange/Treble cut or boost

• Time alignment (Digital program mate-rial in extreme cases can be as much as8 seconds behind the analogue). Thiswill noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

The above items are dependant on thebroadcaster's equipment settings and donot indicate a fault in the vehicle's radioreceiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,when driving through areas with weak HD sig-nals (fringe areas), you may experience that theradio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If thishappens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.To do so:

1. Be sure the audio system is switched onand in AM or FM mode.

2. Press MENU in the center console controlpanel.

3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis-appear from the box on the display screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to receivedigital broadcasts but it will continue to func-tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FMreceiver. Please note that when HD is switchedoff, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-nels (see the following section for a moredetailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD(an X will appear in the box on the displayscreen).

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

��

245

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FMwavebands only) will also have sub-channelsoffering additional types of programming ormusic.

In such cases, the “>” symbol will be displayedto the left of the frequency number and a num-ber will be displayed to the right of the fre-quency number indicating that the currentlytuned frequency has at least one sub-channel.The "2" in the illustration indicates that you arecurrently listening to the first sub-channel onfrequency 93.9.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), pressthe right arrow key on the center console or onthe steering wheel keypad. To go back to themain channel, press the left arrow key. To goto subchannel 2 (if available), press the rightarrow key.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's mainchannel, pressing the left arrow key will tune tothe next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

• When the radio has gone into HD mode,it may take several seconds before the">" symbol (if the current frequency hasany sub-channels) is displayed to theright of the frequency. Pressing thearrow keys before the number is dis-played will cause the radio to tune to thenext available radio station, not to thecurrent station's sub-channels.

• When you are no longer in broadcastingrange of the currently tuned sub-chan-

nel, No HD reception will be dis-played. The radio will then be mutedand it will be necessary to tune to orsearch for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,see page 241 for information on storing sta-tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, itmay take up to 6 seconds before the channelbecomes audible. If you press this button whileyou are out of digital range of the transmitter,No HD reception will be displayed.

Listening to satellite radio

The Sirius satellite system consists of a numberof high elevation satellites in geosynchronousorbit.

NOTE

• The digital signals from the Sirius satel-lites are line-of-sight, which means thatphysical obstructions such as bridges,tunnels, etc, may temporarily interferewith signal reception.

• Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-lic objects transported on roof racks orin a ski box, or other antennas that mayimpede signals from the SIRIUS satel-lites.

Selecting Sirius radio mode

1. Press Power to switch on the audio system(see page 241 for information on the stand-ard radio functions).

2. Press the MODE button repeatedly untilSirius 1 or 2 is displayed.

Activating Sirius radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has noaudio, which means that the channel isunsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539-

SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

246

(see also "Selecting a channel" in the rightcolumn).

2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).

3. When asked for the Sirius ID number pressAUTO to display this number. It is alsopossible to retrieve the Sirius ID from theMENU.

4. "UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will bedisplayed while the subscription is beingupdated, after which the display will returnto the normal view.

SIRIUS ID

The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting theSirius Call Center. It is used to activate youraccount and when making any account trans-actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referredto as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).

Selecting a channel category

1. Select Sirius radio mode as describedabove.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scrollthrough the list of categories.

4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key toselect a category.

5. Use the left or right arrow keys to select achannel in the currently chosen category.

6. Press ENTER to listen to a channel.

NOTE

• The category "All" is default, which ena-bles you to scroll through the entire listof available satellite channels.

• The channel categories are automati-cally updated several times a year. Thistakes approximately two minutes andwill interrupt normal broadcasting. Amessage will be displayed while updat-ing is in progress. Information on chan-nel or feature updates is available atwww.sirius.com.

Selecting a channel

There are three ways of tuning in a channel:

• Using the left and right arrow keys

• By turning the tuning control

• Through direct channel entry

Direct channel entry

The Sirius satellite channels are numberedconsecutively throughout all of the categories.To access a channel directly:

1. Press MENU and scroll to "Direct channelentry."

2. Use the numerical keypad to enter thechannel's number.

3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to thischannel, even if it belongs to a categoryother than the currently selected one.

NOTE

• The numbers of skipped or lockedchannels will not be displayed.

• If a channel is locked, the access codemust be entered before the channel canbe selected. See "Unlocking a channel"on page 247.

Scanning

NOTE

SCAN automatically searches through thelist of satellite channels, see page 242 formore detailed information.

Storing a channel

• A long press on one of the number keysstores the currently tuned channel on thatkey.

• A short press on a number key while theradio is in Sirius 1 or 2 mode will tune to the

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

��

247

preset satellite channel stored on that but-ton, regardless of the currently selectedchannel category.

Song Seek and Song Memory

The Song Seek and Song Memory functionsprovide both audio and visual notification whenSirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.Song Seek enables you to store the name ofthe song for future advance notification whenthat song is being played. The Song Memoryfeature makes it possible to view all of the cur-rent songs that are stored in memory.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system'smemory.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to "Add song to song mem." andfollow the instructions shown in the dis-play.

If a new song is selected when the memory isfull, you will be prompted to press ENTER todelete the last song on the list.

NOTE

The remaining songs in the list will movedown one position, and the newly addedsong will be placed at the top of the list.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of thesongs stored in the song memory, the listenerwill be alerted by a text message and an audi-ble signal.

� Press ENTER to listen to the song orEXIT to cancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek function:

1. Press MENU

2. Scroll to "Song seek"

3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate thefunction.

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio willremain tuned to the channel on which thesong was played.

Radio text

The text that is displayed about the song thatis currently playing can be changed. Use theAUTO button or the menu to display the Artist,

Title, Composer, or switch radio text off.

Advanced settings

This menu function enables you to make set-tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.To access this menu:

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Sirius menu.

3. Select Advanced Sirius settings.

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicleis at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the Sir-ius menu.

• Songs can be added to the song list

• Channel skip settings can be made

• Channel lock settings can be made

• The channel access code can be displayedor changed

• Your Sirius ID can be displayed

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel fromthe list of available channels.

Skip current

1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and pressENTER.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

248

2. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

3. Skip channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER or right arrow key.

Unskip all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe skip list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unskip all ch.

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the skip list and will againbe skipped the next time the ignition isswitched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted(locked). A locked channel will not provideaudio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked.

Locking a channel

1. Select "Sirius ID" in the menu and selectLOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and pressENTER

3. Enter the channel access code and pressENTER.

4. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

5. Lock channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER or right arrow.

The channel is now locked and a checked boxwill be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec-essary to enter the channel access code1 inorder to listen to a locked channel.

Unlocking a channel:

A channel's access code1 is required to unlocka channel.

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe locked list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unlock all ch.

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the locked list and willagain be locked the next time the ignition isswitched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change thechannel access code. The default codeis 0000.

To change the code:

1. Select CHANGE CODE and pressENTER.

2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.

3. Enter the code and press ENTER.

4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.

If an incorrect code is entered, the textWRONG CODE! is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code:

1. Select "SIRIUS ID" in the Sirius settingsmenu and press ENTER.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for2 seconds.

3. The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you withassistance.

SIRIUS ID

This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti-vation ID.

10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

10

��


CD function controls

G026367

MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–pressthe up or down arrow keys to scroll in amenu, or the keys on the left/right sides ofthe control to change CD tracks/fast for-ward/back

Buttons for selecting a disc in theoptional CD changer

CD eject button

CD slot

MODE button

TUNING dial for selecting tracks

Playing a CD

Single CD player

Start the CD player by pressing the MODE but-ton (5) and inserting a disc in the slot (4). If thereis already a disc inserted, it will begin to play.

NOTE

If a CD is in the slot when the audio systemis in CD mode, the CD will be played auto-matically.

CD changer*

The CD changer can hold up to six discs.

1. Start the CD changer by pressing theMODE button (5).

2. Select an empty position using the 1 – 6buttons or the up/down keys on the MENUNAVIGATION CONTROL. The displayshows which positions are empty.

3. Insert a disc into the slot (4).

NOTE

• Ensure that INSERT DISC is displayedbefore inserting a disc.

• If a CD position in the changer contain-ing a disc is selected, and the audiosystem is in CD mode when it isswitched on, the CD will play automati-cally.

CD eject

Eject from Single CD player

� Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.

Eject from CD changer

This function makes it possible to eject a singledisc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer.

� Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject thedisc that is currently playing.

� A longer press (more than two seconds)starts the process of ejecting all of thediscs in the changer.

10 Audio


10

250

NOTE

• The EJECT ALL function can only beused while the vehicle is at a standstilland will be cancelled if the vehiclebegins to move.

• For reasons of traffic safety, the ejectedCD must be removed within 12 secondsor it will be automatically drawn backinto the slot and the CD player will enterpause mode. Press the CD button torestart the disc.

CD Pause

When the audio system volume is turned offcompletely, the CD player will pause and willresume playing when the volume is turned upagain.

Audio files

In addition to playing normal music CDs, theCD player/changer can also play discs con-taining files in mp3 or wma format.

NOTE

Certain discs that are copy protected can-not be read by the player.

When a disc with audio files is inserted in theplayer, the player scans the disc's foldersbefore it begins playing the files. The length of

time that this takes depends on the quality ofthe disc.

Navigating the disc and playing tracks

If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,press ENTER to display a list of folders on thedisc.

Use the up and down arrows in the navigationcontrol (see the illustration on page 249) tomove among the folders on the disc. Audio fileshave the symbol and folders containingthese files have the symbol. PressENTER to play a selected folder or a file.

When the music file has been played, theplayer will continue to play the rest of the filesin the current folder. When all of the files in thefolder have been played, the player will auto-matically go to the next folder and play the filesin it.

Press the left or right arrow key on the naviga-tion control if the entire name of the currenttrack does not fit in the display.

Changing tracks

Briefly press the left or right arrow keys on theMENU NAVIGATION CONTROL to skip to theprevious or next track/file.

NOTE

The TUNING dial (6) (turn clockwise to go tothe next track/file, or counterclockwise togo to the previous track/file) or the steeringwheel keypad can also be used for this pur-pose.

Fast forward/back

� Press and hold down the left or right arrowskeys in the menu navigation control (or thecorresponding keys on the optional steer-ing wheel keypad) to search within a track/file or the whole disc. The search continuesfor as long as the buttons are held down.

Random play

This function plays the tracks/files on a CD (oron all of the CDs if the vehicle is equipped withthe optional CD changer) in random order(shuffle).

Activating/deactivating the random

function-CD player

If a normal CD is being played:


2. Select Random and press ENTER.

If a CD with audio files is being played:



10 Audio


10

��

251

3. Select Disc or Folder and press ENTER.

Activating/deactivating the random

function-CD changer

If a normal CD is being played:



3. Select Single disc or All discs and pressENTER.

If a CD with audio files is being played:



3. Select Single disc or Folder and pressENTER.

NOTE

CD changer only–you can only select thenext random track/file on the current disc.

Press the EXIT button to stop random play.The random function is automatically deacti-vated when another disc is selected.

Disc text (CD changer only)

Certain CDs contain information about thedisc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. Thisinformation can be shown in the display byactivating the DISC TEXT function.

1. Press MENU. Select the menu for relevantsound source and press ENTER.

2. Select Disc text in the menu and pressENTER.> If information is stored on the disc, it will

now appear in the display.

To deactivate this function, select Disc text inthe menu and press ENTER.

Scan

This function plays the first 10 seconds of eachtrack/file on the CD.

� Press SCAN.

� Press EXIT or SCAN to stop the scan func-tion and listen to an entire track/file.

CD eject

Single CD player

Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.

CD changer

This function makes it possible to eject a singledisc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer.

• Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject thedisc that is currently playing.

• A longer press (more than two seconds)starts the process of ejecting all of thediscs in the changer.

NOTE

• The Eject all function can only be usedwhile the vehicle is at a standstill and willbe cancelled if the vehicle begins tomove.

• For reasons of traffic safety, the ejectedCD must be removed within 12 secondsor it will be automatically drawn backinto the slot and the CD player will enterpause mode. Press the CD button torestart the disc.

Compact disc care

Keep the following in mind when playing/han-dling compact discs

• Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself.They could become stuck in the player.

• CDR discs can cause listening problemsdue to the quality of the disc or recordingequipment used.

• DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CDspecifications and may not play in youraudio system.

• Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with asoft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from thecenter outward. If necessary, dampen thecloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor-oughly before using.

10 Audio


10

252

• Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq-uid. Use only cleaners specifically made forCDs.

• Use discs of the correct size only(3.5" discs should never be used).

• Volvo does not recommend the use ofplastic outer rings on the disc.

• Condensation may occur on discs/opticalcomponents of the changer in cold winterweather. The disc can be dried with aclean, lint-free cloth. Optical componentsin the CD changer may, however, take upto one hour to dry off.

• Never attempt to play a damaged CD.

• When not in use, the discs should bestored in their covers. Avoid storing discsin excessive heat, direct sunlight or industy locations.

10 Audio

Audio menu

10

253

FM1/FM2 menu

1. RADIOTEXT ON/OFF

2. ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS

3. AUDIO SETTINGS

AM menu

1. AUDIO SETTINGS

CD menu

1. RANDOM

2. AUDIO SETTINGS

CD changer menu

1. RANDOM

2. DISC TEXT ON/OFF

3. AUDIO SETTINGS

AUX menu

1. AUX VOLUME

2. SOUND SETTINGS

10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

10

254

Introduction

G029503

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone

Center console control panel and display

Bluetooth® hands-free

This feature makes it possible to set up a wire-less connection between a Bluetooth -ena-bled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system.This enables the audio system to function as ahands-free connection and allows you toremote-control a number of the phone’s func-tions. The microphone used by this system islocated in the ceiling console (2). The buttons

and other controls on the cell phone canalways be used regardless of whether or notthe phone is connected to the hands-free sys-tem.

NOTE

Not all cell phones are fully compatible withthe hands-free system. A list of compatiblephones is available at your Volvo retailer orat www.volvocars.us

WARNING

Never use the hands-free feature or anyother device in your vehicle in a way thatdistracts you from the task of driving safely.Distraction can lead to a serious accident.

Getting started

Use the controls in the center console (3) toaccess, navigate and make selections in thehands-free system’s menus (see page 258).

Activating/deactivating

A short press on the PHONE button in the cen-ter console activates the hands-free system.The text TELEPHONE will appear at the top ofthe display to indicate that the audio system isin telephone mode.

The symbol indicates that the hands-freesystem is active.

A long press on the PHONE button deactivatesthe hands-free system and disconnects thecell phone.

Connecting cell phones

The procedure for connecting a cell phone var-ies, depending on the phone itself, and onwhether or not the phone has been previouslyconnected.

If this is the first time the phone is to be con-nected to the hands-free system, proceed asfollows:

Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus

1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func-tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual ifnecessary) or go to www.volvocars.com

2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands-free system by briefly pressing thePHONE button.> Add phone will be displayed. If one or

more cell phones are already registeredin the system, they will also be dis-played.

3. Select Add phone.

10 Audio


10

��

255

> The audio system will search for cellphones that are in range. This searchtakes approximately 30 seconds. Anyphones detected will be displayed withtheir Bluetooth® names. The hands-freesystem’s Bluetooth® name will appearin the cell phone’s display as My Car.

4. Select one of the cell phones shown in theaudio system’s (center console) display.

5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter thedigits shown in the audio system’s display.

Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus

1. Activate the hands-free system by brieflypressing the PHONE button in the centerconsole. If there is a cell phone connected,disconnect it from the hands-free system(by pressing PHONE in the center consolefor several seconds).

2. Perform a search using the cell phone’sBluetooth® function (consult the cellphone’s owner’s manual if necessary).

3. Select My Car in the list of devices shownin the cell phone’s display.

4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234in the cell phone.

5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone.

The cell phone will be registered and will beconnected automatically to the audio systemwhile the text Synchronising is displayed. Formore information on synchronizing a cellphone, see page 257.

When a connection has been established, the symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth®

name will be displayed. The cell phone cannow be controlled from the audio system.

Making a call

1. Ensure that TELEPHONE is shown at thetop of the center console display and thatthe symbol is visible (by pressing brieflyon PHONE on the center console).

2. Dial the desired phone number or use thephone book (see page 257).

3. Press ENTER.

End the call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone

The cell phone is automatically disconnectedfrom the audio system if it is moved out ofrange. For more information about connec-tions, see page 254.

The cell phone can be manually disconnectedfrom the hands-free system by pressingPHONE. The hands-free system is also deac-tivated when the ignition is switched off (or if

the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip-ped with the optional keyless drive).

When the cell phone is disconnected from thehands-free system, a call in progress can becontinued using the cell phone’s own speakerand microphone.

NOTE

Certain cell phones may require confirma-tion from the phone’s keypad when a call istransferred from hands-free to the cellphone.

Handling calls

Incoming calls

� Press ENTER to answer a call, even if theaudio system is currently in e.g., CD or FMmode.

� Press EXIT to defer a call.

Automatic answer

This function means that incoming calls will beanswered automatically. Activate or deactivatethe function in the menu system under Phone

settings Call options Automatic

answer.

10 Audio


10

256

Call settings

While a call is in progress, press MENU orENTER on the center console to access thefollowing functions:

• Microphone off–mute the audio system’smicrophone.

• Transfer call to mobile–transfer the callfrom hands-free to the cell phone.

• Phone book–this feature enables you tosearch for a stored telephone number.

NOTE

• On certain cell phones, the connectionis broken when the mute function isused, which is normal. If this happens,the hands-free system will prompt youto reconnect.

• A new call cannot be initiated whileanother call is in progress.

Sound settings

Call volume

Call volume can be adjusted when the hands-free system is activated. Use the buttons in thesteering wheel keypad or the audio system’svolume control.

Audio system volume

While a phone call is in progress, volume forthe audio system can be adjusted in the normalway with the audio system's volume control. Inorder to adjust volume during a phone call, theaudio system must be switched to one of theother modes (FM, CD, etc).

Audio system sound can be automaticallymuted when a phone call is received in Phone

settings Sounds and volume Mute

radio and adjust the volume with the / keys on the center console.

Ringing volume

Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring volume and adjust the volume withthe / keys on the center console.

Ringing tones

The hands-free system’s integrated ringingtones can be selected in Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring signal Ring

signal 1,2,3....

NOTE

The connected cell phone’s ring tone is notswitched off when one of the hands-freesystem's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’sring tone1, go to Phone settings Sounds

and volume Ring signal Use mobile

phone signal

More information about registeringand connecting cell phones

A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registeredin the hands-free system. Registration onlyneeds to be done once for each phone. Afterregistration, the cell phone no longer needs tobe in sight or searchable. Only one cell phonecan be connected to hands-free at a time.Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth

Remove telephone

Automatic connection

When the hands-free system is active and themost recently connected cell phone is withinrange, it is detected automatically. When the

1 Not supported by all cell phones.

10 Audio


10

��

257

audio system searches for the most recentlyconnected phone, this phone’s name appearsin the display. To manually connect a differentcell phone, press EXIT.

Manual connection

To connect a phone other than the one thatwas most recently connected or to switchbetween cell phones that are already regis-tered in the hands-free system:

1. Put the audio system in telephone mode.2. Press PHONE in the center console and

select one of the phones on the list.

A connection can also be established in themenu system under Bluetooth Connect

phone or Change phone.

Phone book

In order to use the hands-free system’s phonebook (list of contacts), TELEPHONE must bedisplayed at the top of the center console dis-play and the symbol must be visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phonebook of each registered cell phone. The phonebook is automatically copied each time aphone is connected. This function can be acti-vated in Phone settings Synchronise

phone book. Searches for contacts are only

made in the phone book of the currently con-nected cell phone.

NOTE

If a particular cell phone does not supportcopying of the phone book, List is emptywill be displayed when copying has beencompleted.

If the phone book contains information aboutsomeone who is trying to call you, this infor-mation will be shown in the display.

Searching for contacts

The easiest way to search for a contact in thephone book is to press and hold any of thebuttons 2–9 (see the illustration on page 254).This starts a search based on the first letter onthe button that has been pressed.

The phone book can also be accessed bypressing the navigation buttons / on thecenter console or by pressing / on thesteering wheel keypad. A search can also bemade in the phone book’s search menu inPhone book Search:

1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s nameand press ENTER or simply press ENTER.

2. Select the desired contact and pressENTER to make a call to that person.

Voice control

If the cell phone that is currently connectedallows calls to be made via voice commands,this function can be used by pressing and hold-ing ENTER.

Voice mail number

The phone number to your voice mail can bechanged in the menu Phone settings Call

options Voice mail number. If no numberhas been stored, this menu can be accessedby a prolonged press on button 1. Once aphone number has been stored, press andhold 1 to dial this number.

Call lists

Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop-ied to the hands-free system each time thatphone is connected. These lists are then upda-ted while the phone is connected. PressENTER to show the most recently dialed num-bers. Other call lists can be found under Call

register.

NOTE

Certain cell phones display the list of themost recently dialed numbers in reverseorder.

10 Audio


10

258

Entering text

Text is entered by using the number buttons inthe center console. Press a button once toenter the first letter on the button, twice to enterthe second letter, etc. Continue to press thebutton to display other characters.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Pressand hold EXIT to erase all of the characters thathave been entered. Use the / buttons onthe center console to navigate among the char-acters.

Button Function

Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )

A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç

D E F 3 È É

G H I 4 Ì

J K L 5

M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø

P Q R S 7 ß

Button Function

T U V 8 Ü Ù

W X Y Z 9

Press briefly if two characters areto be entered in succession fromthe same button.

+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %

Shift between uppercase andlowercase letters

Bluetooth® menus

1. Missed calls

2. Received calls

3 Dialed calls

4. Phone book

4.1. Search

4.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

5. Bluetooth...

5.1. Change phone

5.2. Connect phone

5.3. Disconnect phone

5.4. Connect fr. mobile phone

6. Phone settings

6.1. Call options

6.1.2. Automatic answer

6.1.3. Voice mail number

6.2. Sounds and volume

6.3. IDIS

6.4. Synchronize phone book

10 Audio

10

259

G000000

260

Label information.................................................................................. 262Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 264Fuel, oils, and fluids.............................................................................. 267Engine oil............................................................................................... 269Engine specifications............................................................................ 270Electrical system................................................................................... 272Three-way catalytic converter............................................................... 274Volvo programs..................................................................................... 275

11SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

Label information

11

262

11 Specifications

Label information

11

263

Model plate

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes forcolor and upholstery, etc.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA)

and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS)

standards (Canada)

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicablesafety standards, as evidenced by the certifi-cation label on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehicle, atthe rear of the driver's door opening). For fur-ther information regarding these regulations,please consult your Volvo retailer.

Loads and Tire Pressures

The appearance of the decal will vary, depend-ing on the market for which the vehicle isintended.

Canadian models have the upper decal.

U.S. models have the lower decal.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)1

The VIN plate is located on the top left surfaceof the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped onthe right hand door pillar.

Vehicle Emission Control Information

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicableemission standards, as evidenced by the cer-tification label on the underside of the hood.For further information regarding these regula-tions, please consult your Volvo retailer.

1 The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

264

Dimensions

Position Dimension

A Wheelbase 103.9 in. (264 cm)

B Length 167.4 in. (425 cm)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 58.7 in. (149 cm)

D Load length, floor 26 in. (66 cm)

E Load height 25.2 in. (64 cm)

F Height 57 in. (145 cm)

G Track, front 60.9 in. (155 cm)

11 Specifications


11

��

265

Position Dimension

H Track, rear 60.8 in. (154 cm)

I Load width, floor 28 in. (71 cm)

J Width 70.2 in. (178 cm)

K Width encl. door mirrors 80.3 in. (204 cm)

Weights

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight Non-turbo: -

Turbo manual: 4320 lbs

Turbo automatic: 4340 lbs

1840 kg

1960 kg

1970 kg

Capacity weight Non-turbo: -

Turbo: 1040 lbs

325 kg

470 kg

Permissible axle weight, front Non-turbo: -

Turbo: 2330 lbs

1060 kg

1060 kg

Permissible axle weight, rear Non-turbo: -

Turbo: 2160 lbs

900 kg

980 kg

Curb weight All models: 3155–3220 lbs 1385–1455 kg

Max. roof load All models: 165 lbs All models: 75 kg

11 Specifications


11

266

CAUTION

The maximum permissible axle loads and/or the gross vehicle weight must not beexceeded.

WARNING

When adding accessories, equipment, lug-gage and other cargo to your vehicle, thetotal capacity weight must not be exceeded.

11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

11

��

267

Specifications and capacities

Category Specification Capacity

Fuel tank Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimumoctane requirement AKI 87, recommended rat-ing AKI 91 or above.

15.9 US gallons (60 liters)

Models with engine code 39 have a fuel tank capacityof 14 US gallons (53 liters). This code is the 6th and7th digits from the left in your vehicle's VIN number.see page 262 for the location of the VIN plate.

Engine oil (with filter replacement) See page 269 for information on engine oilspecifications.

6.1 US quarts (5.8 liters)

Automatic transmission oil JWS 3309 8.14 US quarts (7.7 liters)

Manual transmission oil BOT 350 M3 5-speed: 2.2 US quarts (2.1 liters)

6-speed: 2.0 US quarts (1.9 liters) – turbo models

Coolant Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (50/50 mix-ture of water and anti-freeze)

10.5 US quarts (10 liters) – models with automatictransmission

10 US quarts (9.5 liters) – models with manual trans-mission

Brake fluid DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N9437433


Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A or equivalent 1.3 US quarts (1.2 liters) – system and reservoir com-bined

Washer fluid reservoir Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather con-ditions.


Air conditioning system Refrigerant – R134a 1.2 lbs. (530 grams)

11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

11

268

NOTE

The transmission oil does not normally needto be changed during the service life of thevehicle. However, it may be necessary toreplace the oil if the vehicle is often drivenin areas of sustained temperature extremes(hot or cold), when towing a trailer over longdistances, for prolonged driving in moun-tainous areas, or if the vehicle is often drivenshort distances in temperatures under 40 °F(5 °C).

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

269

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSACspecification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.Lower quality oils may not offer the same fueleconomy, engine performance, or engine pro-tection.

Volume: 6.1 US qts (5.8 liters).

Volume between the MIN and Max marks onthe dipstick: approximately 1.4 US qts (1.3 lit-ers).

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Depending on your driving habits, premium orsynthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ-omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvoretailer or a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician for recommendations on premiumor synthetic oils.

Oil additives must not be used.

NOTE

Synthetic oil is not used when the oil ischanged at the normal service intervals.This oil is only used at customer request, atadditional charge. Please consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine lifeunder normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

good fuel economy and engine protection. Seethe viscosity chart.

G02

3491

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40and complying with oil quality requirements arerecommended for driving in areas of sustainedtemperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow-ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro-longed driving in mountainous areas.

American Petroleum Institute (API)

symbol

G02

2917

The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided intothree parts:

• The upper section describes the oil's per-formance level.

• The center identifies the oil's viscosity.

• The lower section indicates whether the oilhas demonstrated energy-conservingproperties in a standard test in comparisonto a reference oil.

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

270

Engine designation B5244S4A B5254T7

OutputB

kW/rps

hp/rpm

125/100

168/6000

169/83

227/5000

TorqueB

Nm/rps

ft. lbs./rpm

230/73

170/4400

320/25-80

236/1500-4800

No. of cylinders 5 5

Displacement (liters/cubic inches) 2.44/148.6 2.52/153.8

Bore (mm/in.) 83/3.27 83/3.27

Stroke (mm/in.) 90/3.54 93.2/3.67

Compression ratio 10.3:1 9.0:1

Spark plugs

type

gap inches/mm

tightening torque ft. lbs./Nm

Volvo kit no. 30650843

(3x) 0.024 ± 0.004 in./0.6 ± 0.1mm

22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm

Volvo kit no. 30650379

0.027in./0.7mm

22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm

A Certain markets.B The engine specifications for output and torque listed in this table are based on the use of premium fuel.

Charge air cooler (Intercooler)

Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com-pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani-fold and a charge air cooler to cool the com-

pressed inlet air. The resulting increase in airflow raises pressure in the intake manifold andincreases engine power over that developed bythe normally-aspirated engine. The charge air

cooler (which resembles a radiator) is locatedbetween the turbo-compressor and inlet mani-fold.

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

271

Fuel system

The engine is equipped with a multiport fuelinjection system.

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

272

General information

12-volt system with voltage controlled gener-ator. Single wire system in which the chassisand engine block are used as conductors,grounded on the chassis.

Battery

Voltage 12 V 12 V

Cold start capacity

(CCA)

600 AA 700 AB

Reserve capacity

(RC)

120 min 135 min

Capacity (Ah) 70 80

A Models equipped with the High Performance audio system.B Models equipped with the Premium Sound audio system,

the Volvo Navigation System and/or keyless drive.

If the battery must be replaced, replace it withone with the same cold start capacity andreserve capacity as the original (see the decalon the battery).

WARNING



Bulbs used in the car

Bulb Output Type

Low beam headlight 55W H7

High beam headlight 55W H9

Extra high beam (models with Dual Xenon headlights only) 55W H7

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11


Bulb Output Type

Brake light, back-up light, rear fog light 21W P21W

Turn signal, front/rear 21W PY21W

Turn signal, front/rear (applies to models with halogen headlights) 24W P21/5W

Rear parking light, side marker light 5W P21/W5

Footwell lighting, cargo compartment light, license plate lighting 5W C5W

Vanity mirror 1.2W Festoon

Front parking light, side turn signal 5W W5W

Front fog light* 55W H11

Glove compartment light 3W Festoon

NOTE

For information regarding any other bulbsnot mentioned in this section, please con-tact your Volvo retailer or a trained andauthorized Volvo service technician.

11 Specifications

Three-way catalytic converter

11

274

Three-way catalytic converter –general information

• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certainengine malfunctions, particularly involvingthe electrical, fuel or distributor ignitionsystems, may cause unusually high three-way catalytic converter temperatures. Donot continue to operate your vehicle if youdetect engine misfire, noticeable loss ofpower or other unusual operating condi-tions, such as engine overheating or back-firing. A properly tuned engine will helpavoid malfunctions that could damage thethree-way catalytic converter.

• Do not park your vehicle over combustiblematerials, such as grass or leaves, whichcan come into contact with the hot exhaustsystem and cause such materials to igniteunder certain wind and weather condi-tions.

• Excessive starter cranking (in excess ofone minute), or an intermittently firing orflooded engine can cause three-way cata-lytic converter or exhaust system over-heating.

• Remember that tampering or unauthorizedmodifications to the engine, the ElectronicControl Module, or the vehicle may be ille-gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-verter or exhaust system overheating. Thisincludes:

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles withthree-way catalytic converters.

11 Specifications

Volvo programs

11

275

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ONCALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-tion, features, and benefits are described in aseparate information package in your glovecompartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-ports certification by the National Institute forAutomotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-fied technicians have demonstrated a highdegree of competence in specific areas.Besides passing exams, each technician mustalso have worked in the field for two or moreyears before a certificate is issued. These pro-fessional technicians are best able to analyzevehicle problems and perform the necessarymaintenance procedures to keep your Volvo atpeak operating condition.

12 Index

12

276

1, 2, 3 ...

12-volt sockets.......................................... 62

A

A/C (air conditioning)................................. 90

ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 153

Airbagsfront...................................................... 22inflatable curtain................................... 30side impact........................................... 29

Airbag system............................................ 22

Air conditioning.......................................... 90

Air distribution table................................... 99

Air vents..................................................... 92

Alarm system........................................... 132turning off sensors.............................. 133

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 153

Approach lighting...................................... 83

Audio files................................................ 250

Audio systemaudio functions................................... 236automatic sound control..................... 239

AUX port............................................. 236CD changer......................................... 249CD player/changer.............................. 249compact disc care.............................. 251Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............... 239equalizer............................................. 239HD digital radio................................... 243menu settings..................................... 253radio functions.................................... 241selecting a sound source.................... 236Sirius satellite radio............................ 245sound settings.................................... 238steering wheel keypad........................ 237storing radio stations.......................... 241USB/iPod connector........................ 237

Auto-dim rearview mirror........................... 77

Autolock..................................................... 82

Automatic locking retractor....................... 36

Automatic sound control......................... 239

Automatic transmission........................... 150kickdown............................................ 151oil........................................................ 267shiftlock override................................ 152

Automatic transmission - Geartronic....... 151

AUX port.................................................. 236

Axle weight...................................... 180, 265

B

Backrest, rear seat, folding...................... 115

Bass......................................................... 238

Batterymaintenance....................................... 217remote key, replacing......................... 123specifications...................................... 272warning symbols................................. 217

Battery – replacing................................... 218

Black Box (Vehicle Event Data)............... 206

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 161

Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 254

Booster cushionaccessory............................................. 43

Brake fluid........................................ 215, 267

Brake lights................................................ 63

Brake systemanti-lock brakes (ABS)........................ 153emergency brake assistance.............. 154fluid..................................................... 215general information............................. 153

Bulbsheadlights........................................... 219list of................................................... 272

12 Index

12

277

Bulbs, replacing....................................... 219

C

Capacities, fluids..................................... 267

Capacity weight............................... 180, 265

Cargo areasteel grid............................................. 117

Cargo area cover............................. 117, 118

Cargo area net......................................... 119

Catalytic converter, three-way................. 274

CD changer.............................................. 249

CD player................................................. 249

Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 254

Central locking system - remote key....... 122

Chains...................................................... 182

Changing a wheel.................................... 185

Child restraintsrecalls and registration......................... 46

Child restraint systems.............................. 37booster cushions.................................. 43ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 44top tether anchors................................ 45

Child safety................................................ 35booster cushions.................................. 43child restraint systems.......................... 37

Climate systemair distribution....................................... 99air vents................................................ 92Electronic Climate Control.................... 96manual climate control......................... 93passenger compartment filter.............. 90refrigerant..................................... 90, 267

Climate system, general information......... 90

Clocksetting................................................... 82

Coat hanger............................................. 112

Cold weather precautions........................ 139

Compact disc care.................................. 251

Compass in rearview mirror....................... 77

Conserving electrical current................... 140

Coolant.................................................... 267changing............................................. 214checking level of................................. 214

Courtesy lighting...................................... 110

Crash mode............................................... 34

Cruise control............................................ 69

Cup holders..................................... 111, 113

Curb weight..................................... 180, 265

D

Detachable key blade.............................. 124

Dimensions.............................................. 264

Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-bag............................................................. 26

Display....................................................... 60

Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 239

Door mirrors............................................... 78

Driving economically................................ 138

Driving through water.............................. 139

DSTC, stability system............................ 155

E

Economical driving.................................. 138

Electrical current – conserving................ 140

Electrically operated moonroof.................. 80

Electrical system...................................... 272

Electronic Brake Force Distribution(EBD)........................................................ 154

12 Index

12

278

Electronic Climate Control......................... 91air distribution table.............................. 99

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)............... 96

Emergency brake....................................... 75

Emergency locking retractor...................... 36

Emergency starting.................................. 159

Emergency towing................................... 157

Emission inspection readiness................ 208

Enginespecifications...................................... 270starting................................................ 146starting with keyless drive.................. 148

Engine compartment overview................ 211

Engine oil................................................. 212changing............................................. 212checking............................................. 212specifications...................................... 269volumes.............................................. 267

Equalizer, audio system........................... 239

Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 117

F

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 206

Flat tireschanging............................................. 185repairing with tire sealing system....... 187

Fluids and oils.......................................... 267

FM1/FM2 menu....................................... 241

Fog lightsfront...................................................... 63rear........................................................ 64

Front airbags.............................................. 22disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 26

Front fog lights........................................... 63

Front park assist...................................... 165

Front seats............................................... 102accessing the rear seat...................... 102adjusting the head restraints.............. 108manually operated.............................. 102power.................................................. 106

Fuel filler doorunlocking.............................................. 64

Fuel gauge................................................. 53

Fuel requirements.................................... 142

Fuel tank volume..................................... 267

Fuses, replacing...................................... 227

G

Gasoline requirements............................. 142

Geartronic................................................ 151

Glossary of tire terminology..................... 179

Glove compartment................................. 112locking................................................ 131

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)............ 180, 265

H

Hand brake (parking brake)....................... 75

Hazard warning flashers............................ 74

HD digital radio........................................ 243

Headlights.................................................. 63changing bulbs................................... 219high and low beams............................. 65high beam flash.................................... 65

Headlight washers..................................... 71

High beam flash......................................... 65

High beams................................................ 65

12 Index

12

279

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 208

Home safe lighting............................... 65, 83

Hood, opening......................................... 210

I

Ignition switch.......................................... 145

Immobilizer.............................................. 146

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 122

Indicator and warning symbols............ 53, 55

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 30

Inflation pressure..................................... 173

Inflation pressure, checking..................... 174

Inflation pressure tableCanadian models................................ 176US models.......................................... 175

Information display.............................. 53, 60messages in.......................................... 60

Information symbol.................................... 55

Inspection, preparing for......................... 208

Inspection readiness................................ 208

Instrument overview.................................. 50

Instrument panel.................................. 50, 53

Instrument panel lighting........................... 64

Interior lighting......................................... 110

iPod connector (audio system)............. 237

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 44

J

Jacket hanger.......................................... 112

Jump starting........................................... 159

K

Key (ignition switch) positions................. 145

Key blade......................................... 124, 128

Keyless drivelocation of antennas (pacemaker warn-ing)...................................................... 129locking and unlocking the vehicle...... 127power seat memory............................ 128starting the engine.............................. 148

Keylock.................................................... 146

Kickdown................................................. 151

L

Label information..................................... 262

LATCH (ISOFIX) anchors........................... 44

Liftgate wiper........................................... 216

Liftgate wiper/washer................................ 72

Lighting panel............................................ 63

Load anchoring eyelets........................... 117

Loading the vehicleroof loads............................................ 160

Lockingfrom the inside.................................... 131glove compartment............................. 131

Locking the vehicle.................................. 127

Long distance trips.................................. 140

Lug nuts (wheel nuts)............................... 184

M

Maintenance............................................ 206hoisting the vehicle............................. 208performed by the owner..................... 208

Manual climate control.............................. 93

Manual transmission................................ 149

12 Index

12

280

Mirrors....................................................... 77

Model plate.............................................. 263

Moonroof................................................... 80

Motor oil........................................... 212, 269checking............................................. 212

N

Net in cargo area..................................... 119

O

Occupant safety........................................ 16

Occupant weight sensor............................ 26

Octane recommendations....................... 142

Oil............................................................. 212changing............................................. 212checking............................................. 212

On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 275

Opening the hood.................................... 210

Owner maintenance................................. 208

P

Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 64

Park assist............................................... 165

Parking brake............................................. 75

Parking lights............................................. 63

Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 26

Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 208

Permissible axle weight........................... 180

Personal settings....................................... 82

Power door mirrors.................................... 78

Power front seat...................................... 106memory function................................. 107

Power moonroof........................................ 80

Power steering fluid................................. 215

Power windows......................................... 76

Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 19

R

RadioSirius satellite radio............................ 245

Radio functions........................................ 241HD digital radio................................... 243

Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 72

Rear fog light............................................. 64

Rear park assist....................................... 165

Rear seat backrests, folding down.......... 115

Rearview mirror.......................................... 77auto-dim function................................. 77

Rearview mirror with compass.................. 77

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 46

Refrigerant (A/C system).................... 90, 267

Refueling.................................................. 144fuel tank volume................................. 267

Registering child restraints........................ 46

Remote key.............................................. 122battery replacement............................ 123functions............................................. 122key blade............................................ 124

Replacing fuses....................................... 227

Reporting safety defectsCanada................................................. 17USA....................................................... 16

Roof loads............................................... 160

12 Index

12

281

S

Safety, occupant........................................ 16

Safety defects, reportingCanada................................................. 17USA....................................................... 16

Seat beltreminder................................................ 20

Seat belts................................................... 18Automatic locking retractor/Emergencylocking retractor.................................... 36buckling................................................ 18guides................................................... 19maintenance......................................... 20pretensioners........................................ 18unbuckling............................................ 18use during pregnancy........................... 19

Seats, front.............................................. 102

Shiftlockoverride............................................... 152

Side door mirrors....................................... 78

Side impact airbags................................... 29

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 29

Sirius satellite radio.................................. 245

Snow chains............................................ 182

Snow tires................................................ 182

Sound control, automatic........................ 239

Sound settings, audio system................. 238

Spare tire................................................. 183

Stability system....................................... 155Dynamic Stability Traction Control(DSTC)................................................ 155

Starting the engine.................................. 146with keyless drive............................... 148

Start inhibitor (immobilizer).............. 122, 146

STC, stability system............................... 155

Steering wheeladjusting............................................... 74keypad................................................ 237

Storage compartments............................ 111

Studded tires........................................... 182

Sunroof (moonroof).................................... 80

Supplemental restraint system.................. 21

T

Tachometer................................................ 53

Tailgate wipers......................................... 216

Temporary spare tire............................... 183

Three-way catalytic converter................. 274

Tire inflation............................................. 173

Tire inflation pressureCanadian models................................ 176US models.......................................... 175

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 193

Tires......................................................... 170age...................................................... 170changing............................................. 185changing from summer to winter........ 171designations....................................... 177glossary of terms................................ 179improving economy............................ 170inflation............................................... 173inflation pressure, checking................ 174inflation pressure table, Canadian mod-els....................................................... 176inflation pressure table, US models.... 175load ratings......................................... 174rotation............................................... 171snow................................................... 182spare................................................... 183speed ratings...................................... 174storing................................................. 171studded............................................... 182tire pressure monitoring system......... 193tire sealing system.............................. 187

12 Index

12

282

tread wear indicator............................ 172uniform tire quality grading................. 181winter driving...................................... 182

Tire sealing system.................................. 187

Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-tems).......................................................... 45

Towing the vehicle................................... 157

TransmissionGeartronic........................................... 151manual................................................ 149shiftlock override................................ 152

Tread wear indicator................................ 172

Treble....................................................... 238

Trip computer............................................ 67

Trips, long distance................................. 140

Turn signals............................................... 65indicator lights...................................... 53

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 181

V

Vehicle dimensions.................................. 264

Vehicle Event Data................................... 206

Vehicle loading........................................ 180roof loads............................................ 160

Vehicle maintenanceperformed by the owner..................... 208

Vehicle towing......................................... 157

Vehicle weights........................................ 265

VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)......... 263

Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................. 30

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 275

W

Warning flashers, hazard........................... 74

Warning symbol......................................... 55

Warranties................................................ 206

Washer fluid..................................... 214, 267

Washer fluid reservoir...................... 211, 214

Water, driving through............................. 139

Weights.................................................... 265

Wheel nuts............................................... 184

Wheels..................................................... 170changing............................................. 185storing................................................. 171

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)....... 32

Windowspower.................................................... 76

Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 211

Windshield wiper blades.......................... 216

Windshield wipers...................................... 71rains sensor.......................................... 72

Winter tires............................................... 182

Wiper bladesreplacing liftgate wiper....................... 216replacing windshield wipers............... 216

�� !��"��#��$�%&��

Documents

VOLVO C30 Owner's manualnew.volvocars.com/ownersdocs/2010/2010_C30/2010C30OwnersManual.pdf · Volvo and the environment 12 Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-tomers